(H2S & H2O) - SpectraSensors€¦ · 2-Pack H2S/H2O Analyzer System ii 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13 To start up the analyzer on process sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-Pack Analyzer System

(H2S & H2O)

Operator’s Manual

4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

2-Pack Analyzer System

H2S & H2O Analyzer

Operator’s ManualThis manual applies to firmware versions:

FS 5.13, v2.50

Products of

4333 W Sam Houston Pkwy N, Suite 100Houston, TX 77043-1223

Tel: 800.619.2861Fax: 713.856.6623

www.spectrasensors.com

Copyright © 2013 SpectraSensors, Inc. No part of this manual may be reproduced inwhole or in part without the express written permission of SpectraSensors, Inc.SpectraSensors reserves the right to change product design and specifications at anytime without prior notice.

Revision History

Revision Engineering Order Date

H EO14658 2/23/12

I ECR15049 12/11/12

J ECR15053 12/12/12

K ECR15339 8/15/13

TABLE OF CONTENTS

List of Figures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vii

List of Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ix

1: Introduction

Who Should Read This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1How to Use This Manual. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

General Warnings and Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1Conventions Used in this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

SpectraSensors Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2About the Gas Analyzers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3How the Analyzers Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

Wavelength Modulation Spectroscopy (WMS) Signal Detection . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6

2: Installation

What Should be Included in the Shipping Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1Inspecting the Analyzer and SCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1Getting Familiar with the Analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

Analyzer electronics assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3Hardware and Tools for Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

Mounting the Analyzer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8To mount the analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9

Connecting Electrical Power to the Analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9To connect electrical power to the analyzer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10Field Interface Loads (Solenoid Valves) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12

Connecting Electrical Power to the Enclosure Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12To connect electrical power to the enclosure heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13

Connecting the Output Signals and Alarms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15To connect the H2S analyzer signal and alarm cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15To connect the H2O analyzer signal and alarm cables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17

Changing the 4-20 mA Current Loop Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19To change the H2S analyzer 4-20 mA board from source to sink . . . . . . . . . 2-19To change the H2O analyzer 4-20 mA board from source to sink . . . . . . . . . 2-21

Connecting the Gas Lines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21To connect the sample supply lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21To connect the sample/bypass returns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22To connect the pneumatic valve source (if applicable) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23

Application of Conduit Lubricant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24Connecting the Validation Gas (If Applicable) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25

To connect the validation source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25Conditioning the SCS Tubing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25

3: Sample Conditioning System

About the SCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1Checking the SCS Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

To perform SCS installation checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Starting up the SCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

To prepare for SCS startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3To start up the sample system heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4To start up the field pressure reducing station. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4To start up the sample bypass stream on process sample. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

Operator’s Manual i

2-Pack H2S/H2O Analyzer System

To start up the analyzer on process sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5Shutting Down the SCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

To isolate the measurement sample cell for short-term shutdown . . . . . . . . . 3-7To isolate the SCS for short-term shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7To isolate the process sample tap for long-term shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8

Periodic SCS Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10Servicing the H2S Scrubber . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11

To replace the scrubber and scrubber efficiency indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13Disposal of Used Scrubbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15

4: Operating the H2S Analyzer

Firmware Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Powering Up the Analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

To power up the analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Powering Down the Analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

To power down the analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3Operating the Analyzer from the Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3Modes Defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

Mode 1: (Normal Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5Mode 2: (Set Parameter Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5Mode 3: (Scrubber Life Data) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5Mode 4: (System Diagnostic Parameters) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6Mode 5: (Analog Output Test Mode). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7Mode 6: (Diagnostic Data Download) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7Mode 7: (Measure Port1 Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8Mode 8: (Measure Port2 Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8Mode 9: (Recall Validation Results) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9Mode TEST: (Analog Input Test Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9

Changing Measurement and Control Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9To change parameters in Mode 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13

Measurement and Control Parameters Defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-132 Way Com Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-134-20 mA Alarm Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-144-20 mA Val Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14AI 4 mA Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15AI 20 mA Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15AI Pressure Input. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15AO 4 mA Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15AO 20 mA Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16AO 4-20 mA Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16Baud Rate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16Calculate Dew Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17Cancel Val Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17Concentration Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17Custom Precision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18Daily Validation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19Dew Point Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19DO Alarm Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19General Alarm DO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21High Alarm Setpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21Keypad Watchdog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22Logger Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22Low Alarm Setpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22Modbus Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23Modbus Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23New Scrub Installed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23Peak Tracking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24Pipeline Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24

ii 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

Table of Contents

Pressure Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25Process Purge Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25Rapid Change Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25RATA (Relative Accuracy Test Audit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25RATA Multiplier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26RATA Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26Set Time - Day . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26Set Time - Hour. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27Set Time - Minute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27Set Time - Month. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27Set Time - Year . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27Start Validation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28Temperature Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28Val 1 Concentration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28Val 2 Concentration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29Val Attempts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29Val Auto DumpSpectrm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29Val Duration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30Validation Allowance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30Val Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30Val Perm Constant Kp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30Val Perm Rate Rp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31Val Purge Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31Val Start Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32Zero Val Tolerance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32

Adjusting Analyzer Reading to Match Specific Standard(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32To adjust the analyzer reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33

Scaling and Calibrating the Current Loop Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33To scale the current loop signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34

Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34Alarms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35

System Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35User Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37Historical Alarm Flag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38Assignable Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39

Validating the Analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40To validate automatically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40To validate semi-automatically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40

Calibrating the Analyzer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41

5: Firmware FS 5.13 Serial Port Communications

Receiving Serial Data (Customer Port Output) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1To launch HyperTerminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1To capture and save data from the serial port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6To read diagnostic data with HyperTerminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

Modbus Communications Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Framing/Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Reading/Writing in Daniel Modbus Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Reading/Writing in Gould Modbus Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Endianness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9To enable Modbus communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10

Modbus Accessible Parameter Definitions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14

6: Ethernet Communications

Configuring the Ethernet Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1To configure the ethernet port. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

Operator’s Manual iii


Setup Mode: Server Configuration (Option 0). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2Set Gateway IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2Netmask: Number of Bits for Host Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2Change Telnet Configuration Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3DHCP Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Setup Mode: Channel Configuration (Option 1). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4Baud Rate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4I/F (Interface) Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Port Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Connect Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

a) Incoming Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6b) Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6c) Active Startup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6d) Datagram Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10e) Modem Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10

Send the Escape Sequence (+++) in Modem Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12Show IP addr after 'RING' . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13Auto Increment Source Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13Remote IP Address. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13Remote Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13DisConnMode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13Flush Mode (Buffer Flushing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14Pack Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14

Packing Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15Trailing Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15Send Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16

DisConnTime (Inactivity Timeout) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16Send Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17Telnet Terminal Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17Channel (Port) Password. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17

Expert Settings (Option 5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17TCP Keepalive time in seconds. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17ARP Cache timeout in seconds. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18Disable Monitor Mode at bootup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18MTU Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18Enable alternate MAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18Ethernet connection type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18

Security Settings (Option 6). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19Disable Telnet Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19Disable TFTP Firmware Upgrade. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19Disable Port 77FE (Hex) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19Disable ECHO Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19Enable Enhanced Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19Disable Port 77F0 (Hex) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20

Default Settings (Option 7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20Monitor Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21

To enter Monitor Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21Monitor Mode Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21

7: Operating the H2O Analyzer

Firmware Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1Powering Up the Analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

To power up the analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1Powering Down the Analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2

To power down the analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2Operating the Analyzer from the Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

iv 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

Table of Contents

Modes Defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4Mode 1: (Normal Display) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4Mode 2: (Change Parameters). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4Mode 3: (Not Used) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5Mode 4: (Diagnostic Parameters). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5Mode 5: (Not Used) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5Mode 6: (Export Diagnostic Data) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5Mode 7: (Validation Measurements) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6Mode 8: (Not Used) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6Mode TEST: (System Test) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6

Changing Measurement and Control Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7To change parameters in Mode 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9

Measurement and Control Parameters Defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9# Spectrum Average . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-94-20 mA Alarm Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-104-20 mA % Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-104-20 mA Val Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-104 mA Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1120 mA Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11Analyzer ID. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11Component ID. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12Concen Unit Convert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12Concentration Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12DO Alarm Delay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13DO Alarm Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13Logger Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14Low Power Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15Main Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15Modbus Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15Modbus Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15Peak Tracking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16Pressure Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16Sample ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16S Factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17S Factor Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17Temperature Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17User Password. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18Validation Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18

Adjusting Analyzer Reading to Match Specific Standard(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18To adjust the analyzer reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19

Scaling and Calibrating the Current Loop Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19To scale the current loop signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20

Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20Faults/Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20Validating the Analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21

To validate manually (if applicable):. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21Calibrating the Analyzer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22

8: Firmware v2.50 Serial Port Communications

Receiving Serial Data (Customer Port Output) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1To launch HyperTerminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1To capture and save data from the serial port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4To read diagnostic data with HyperTerminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4

Viewing Diagnostic Data with Microsoft Excel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5To import the data file into Excel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5

Modbus Communications Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11Framing/Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12

Operator’s Manual v


Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12Reading/Writing in Daniel Modbus Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12Reading/Writing in Gould Modbus Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12Endianness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13To enable Modbus communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13

Modbus Accessible Parameter Definitions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16

Appendix A: Specifications

Spare Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-7

Appendix B: Troubleshooting the Analyzer

Gas Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1Contamination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1

To keep the sampling lines clean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1Cleaning the Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2

Tools and supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4To clean the mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4Stainless steel mirror replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-6

Excessive Sampling Gas Temperatures and Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-8Electrical Noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-8Peak Tracking Reset Procedure (FS 5.13). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-8

To reset the Peak Tracking function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-8Peak Tracking Reset Procedure (v2.50) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-9

To check the PkDf and PkD1 values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-10To reset Peak Tracking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-10

Instrument Problems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-11Service Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-17

Customer Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-18Return Material Authorization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-18

Disclaimers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-18Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-18

Appendix C: Water Correlation

Water Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1Dew Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2

Dew Point Conversion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2Raoult’s Law. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2Arden Buck Equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3ASTM1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3ASTM2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3ISO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-4

Method Comparisons for Natural Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-10The Arden Buck Method Comparison . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-14

References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-15

Appendix D: Certifications of Conformity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Index-1

vi 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

LIST OF FIGURES

Figure 1–1. Schematic of a typical laser diode absorption spectrometer............ 1-4Figure 1–2. Typical raw signal from a laser diode absorption spectrometer

with and without mirror contamination........................................ 1-5Figure 1–3. Typical normalized absorption signal from a laser diode

absorption spectrometer ........................................................... 1-5Figure 1–4. Typical normalized 2f signal where the species concentration

is proportional to the peak height............................................... 1-6

Figure 2–1. General system hardware outline ............................................... 2-2Figure 2–2. H2S analyzer electronics control board (AC) showing signal

terminal block and alarm relays ................................................. 2-4Figure 2–3. H2S analyzer electronics control board (DC) showing signal

terminal block and alarm relays ................................................. 2-5Figure 2–4. H2O analyzer electronics control board (AC) showing signal

terminal block and alarm relays ................................................. 2-6Figure 2–5. H2O analyzer electronics control board (DC) showing signal

terminal block and alarm relays ................................................. 2-7Figure 2–6. AC single phase (120 VAC) connection terminal block in

analyzer electronics enclosure ................................................. 2-11Figure 2–7. AC split phase (240 VAC) connection terminal block in

electronics enclosure .............................................................. 2-11Figure 2–8. DC connection (24 VDC) terminal block in analyzer

electronics enclosure .............................................................. 2-12Figure 2–9. AC connection terminal block for 120 VAC enclosure heater ......... 2-13Figure 2–10. AC connection terminal block for 240 VAC enclosure heater ......... 2-14Figure 2–11. Mating terminal block (TB2) for connecting signal cables ............. 2-16Figure 2–12. H2S analyzer relay driver and 4-20 mA board stack .................... 2-20Figure 2–13. 4-20 mA board ..................................................................... 2-20

Figure 3–1. Predicted scrubber lifetime based on average H2S load ............... 3-12Figure 3–2. Scrubber and scrubber efficiency indicator................................. 3-13Figure 3–3. H2S scrubber/dryer efficiency indicator before and after

breakthrough ........................................................................ 3-14

Figure 4–1. H2S keypad (FS 5.13 Firmware)................................................. 4-4Figure 4–2. LCD display with alarm code visible indicating Pressure

Low Alarm fault ..................................................................... 4-38

Figure 5–1. Connection Description window (FS 5.13).................................... 5-2Figure 5–2. Connect To window (FS 5.13) .................................................... 5-2Figure 5–3. COM Properties window (FS 5.13) .............................................. 5-3Figure 5–4. Hyperterminal window with streaming data (FS 5.13) ................... 5-3Figure 5–5. Sample diagnostic data output (FS 5.13)..................................... 5-4

Operator’s Manual vii


Figure 7–1. H2O analyzer keypad (v2.50 Firmware)....................................... 7-3

Figure 8–1. Connection Description window (v2.50) ...................................... 8-2Figure 8–2. Connect To window (v2.50)....................................................... 8-2Figure 8–3. COM Properties window (v2.50) ................................................. 8-3Figure 8–4. Hyperterminal window with streaming data (v2.50) ...................... 8-3Figure 8–5. Sample Mode 6 data output (v2.50) ........................................... 8-6Figure 8–6. Opening a data file in Excel ....................................................... 8-8Figure 8–7. Setting data type in Text Import Wizard ..................................... 8-8Figure 8–8. Setting Tab and Comma as delimiters......................................... 8-9Figure 8–9. Highlighting imported data for plotting in Excel ............................ 8-9Figure 8–10. Chart Wizard - Step 1 window ..................................................8-10Figure 8–11. Data file plot in Excel...............................................................8-10Figure 8–12. Format Data Series window......................................................8-11

Figure A–1. Standard outline schematic of 2-Pack analyzer system.................. A-3Figure A–2. Standard Outline schematic (side view) of 2-Pack

analyzer system ...................................................................... A-4Figure A–3. Standard flow schematic of 2-Pack analyzer system...................... A-5Figure A–4. Standard electrical schematic of 2-Pack analyzer system............... A-6

Figure B–1. Measurement cell types ............................................................ B-3Figure B–2. Stainless steel mirror marking ................................................... B-3Figure B–3. Stainless steel mirror - mirror side up......................................... B-7

Figure C–1. Comparison of calculation results for ASTM1 [8], ASTM2 [9]and ISO [10] methods with experimental data from the GERGreport [14] for mixture NG1 .................................................... C-11




Figure C–5. Courses of measured water contents at 60 bar for naturalgas mixtures NG1, NG3, NG4 and NG7 ..................................... C-13

viii 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

LIST OF TABLES

Table 2–1. H2S analyzer fuse specifications ................................................. 2-3Table 2–2. H2O analyzer fuse specifications................................................. 2-3Table 2–3. H2S analyzer input/output signal connections............................. 2-16Table 2–4. H2O analyzer input/output signal connections ............................ 2-18

Table 4–1. Typical values for parameter setpoints ........................................ 4-9Table 4–2. Assignable Alarm functionality ................................................. 4-20Table 4–3. LCD display alarm codes ......................................................... 4-38

Table 5–1. Modbus register map [FS 5.13]................................................ 5-11Table 5–2. Status flags........................................................................... 5-19Table 5–3. ASCII Character Map .............................................................. 5-20

Table 6–1. BootP/DHCP/AutoIP options....................................................... 6-2Table 6–2. Standard IP network netmasks .................................................. 6-3Table 6–5. Flow control options ................................................................. 6-5Table 6–3. Interface Mode options ............................................................. 6-5Table 6–4. Common Interface Mode settings ............................................... 6-5Table 6–6. Reserved port numbers............................................................. 6-6Table 6–7. Connect Mode options .............................................................. 6-7Table 6–8. Modem Mode messages .......................................................... 6-11Table 6–9. Modem Mode commands......................................................... 6-11Table 6–10. Disconnect Mode options......................................................... 6-14Table 6–11. Flush Mode options ................................................................ 6-15Table 6–12. Pack Control options............................................................... 6-16Table 6–13. Default settings ..................................................................... 6-20Table 6–14. Monitor Mode commands ........................................................ 6-22Table 6–15. Command response codes....................................................... 6-23

Table 7–1. Measurement and control parameters [H2O analyzer] ................... 7-7Table 7–2. Secondary digital output functionality ....................................... 7-13

Table 8–1. Modbus register map [v2.50]................................................... 8-15

Table A–1. Analyzer specifications.............................................................. A-1Table A–2. Replacement parts for H2S & H2O analyzer .................................. A-7

Table B–1. Potential instrument problems and solutions .............................. B-11

Table C–1. Common reference conditions.................................................... C-2Table C–2. Gas composition [14] ............................................................... C-5Table C–3. Coefficients for Eq. (15) [14] ..................................................... C-6

Operator’s Manual ix


Table C–4. Binary interaction parameters [14]............................................. C-7Table C–5. Experimental gas compositions [14] ......................................... C-10Table C–6. Range of composition applicable to ISO method [10] .................. C-14

x 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

1 - INTRODUCTION

SpectraSensors’ 2-Pack analyzer system products are high-speed, diode-laser based extractive analyzers designed for extremely reliable monitoring of very low (trace) to standard concentrations of specific components in various background gases. In order to ensure that the analyzer performs as specified, it is important to closely review the installation and operation sections of this manual. This manual contains a comprehensive overview of the 2-Pack analyzer system and step-by-step instructions on:

• Inspecting the analyzer and sample conditioning system (SCS)

• Installing the analyzer and SCS

• Powering up the analyzer

• Operating the analyzer

• Serial port communications

• Powering down the analyzer

• Troubleshooting the system

Who Should Read This ManualThis manual should be read and referenced by anyone installing, operating or maintaining the analyzer.

How to Use This ManualTake a moment to familiarize yourself with this Operator’s Manual by reading the Table of Contents.

There are a number of options and accessories available for the 2-Pack analyzer system. This manual has been written to address the most common options and accessories. Images, tables and charts have been included to provide a visual understanding of the analyzers and its functions. Special symbols are also used to provide the user with key information regarding the system configuration and/or operation. Pay close attention to this information.

General Warnings and CautionsInstructional icons are provided in this manual and on the 2-Pack analyzer system to alert the user of potential hazards, important information and valuable tips. Following are the symbols and associated warning and caution types to observe when servicing the analyzer. Some of these symbols are provided for instructional purposes only and are not labeled on the system.

General notes and important information concerning the installation and operation of the analyzer.

Operator’s Manual 1–1


Conventions Used in this ManualIn addition to the symbols and instructional information, this manual is created with “hot links” to enable the user to quickly navigate between different sections within the manual. These links include table, figure and section references and are identified by a pointing finger cursor when rolling over the text. Simply click on the link to navigate to the associated reference.

SpectraSensors OverviewSpectraSensors, Inc. (SSI) is a leading manufacturer of technologically advanced electro-optic gas analyzers for the industrial process, gas distribution and environmental monitoring markets. Headquartered in Houston, Texas, SSI was incorporated in 1999 as a spin-off of the NASA/Caltech Jet Propulsion Laboratory (JPL) for the purpose of commercializing space-proven measurement technologies initially developed at JPL.

Warning statement for hazardous voltage. Contact may cause electric shock or burn. Turn off and lock out system before servicing.

Failure to follow all directions or substitution of components may result in explosion.

Failure to follow all directions may result in fire.

INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION - Avoid exposure to beam. Class 3b Radiation Product. Refer servicing to the manufacturer-qualified personnel.

Failure to follow all directions may result in damage or malfunction of the analyzer.

Maximum voltage and current specifications for the fuse closest to label.

!

V A

1–2 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

Introduction

About the Gas AnalyzersThe 2-Pack analyzer system includes tunable diode laser (TDL) absorption spectrometers operating in the near- to short-wavelength infrared. Each compact sensor consists of a TDL light source, sample cell and detector specifically configured to enable high sensitivity measurement of a particular component within the presences of other gas phase constituents in the stream. The sensor is controlled by microprocessor-based electronics with embedded software that incorporates advanced operational and data processing algorithms.

A sample conditioning system (SCS) is included with the system, which has been specifically designed to deliver an optimum sample stream representative of the process systems stream at the time of sampling. Most 2-Pack analyzer systems are configured for use at extractive natural gas sampling stations.

How the Analyzers WorkThe 2-Pack analyzer system employs tunable diode laser absorption spectro-scopy (TDLAS) to detect the presence of trace substances in process gases. Absorption spectroscopy is a widely used technique for sensitive trace species detection. Because the measurement is made in the volume of the gas, the response is much faster, more accurate and significantly more reliable than traditional surface-based sensors that are subject to surface contamination.

In its simplest form, a diode laser absorption spectrometer typically consists of a sample cell with a mirror at one end, and a mirror or window at the opposite end through which the laser beam can pass. Refer to Figure 1–1. The laser beam enters the cell and reflects off the mirror(s) making one or more trips through the sample gas and eventually exiting the cell where the remaining beam intensity is measured by a detector. With the 2-Pack analyzer system, sample gas flows continuously through the sample cell ensuring that the sample is always representative of the flow in the main pipe.



Figure 1–1 Schematic of a typical laser diode absorption spectrometer

Due to their inherent structure, the molecules in the sample gas each have characteristic natural frequencies (or resonances). When the output of the laser is tuned to one of those natural frequencies, the molecules with that particular resonance will absorb energy from the incident beam. That is, as the beam of incident intensity, I0(λ), passes through the sample, attenuation occurs via absorption by the trace gas with absorption cross section σ(λ). According to the Beer-Lambert absorption law, the intensity remaining, I(λ), as measured by the detector at the end of the beam path of length / (cell length x number of passes), is given by

, (1)

where N represents the species concentration. Thus, the ratio of the absorption measured when the laser is tuned on-resonance versus off-resonance is directly proportional to the number of molecules of that particular species in the beam path, or

. (2)

Figure 1–2 shows the typical raw data from a laser absorption spectrometer scan including the incident laser intensity, I0(λ), and the transmitted intensity, I(λ), for a clean system and one with contaminated mirrors (shown to illustrate the system’s relative intensity to mirror contamination). The positive slope of raw data results from ramping the current to tune the laser, which not only increases the wavelength with current, but also causes the corresponding

I λ( ) I0 λ( )exp σ λ( )lN–[ ]=

N 1–σ λ( )l-------------- I λ( )

I0 λ( )-------------ln=

1–4 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

Introduction

output power to increase. By normalizing the signal by the incident intensity, any laser output fluctuations are cancelled, and a typical, yet more pronounced, absorption profile results. Refer to Figure 1–3.

Figure 1–2 Typical raw signal from a laser diode absorption spectrometer with and without mirror contamination

Figure 1–3 Typical normalized absorption signal from a laser diode absorption spectrometer



Note that contamination of the mirrors results solely in lower overall signal. However, by tuning the laser off-resonance as well as on-resonance and normalizing the data, the technique self calibrates every scan resulting in measurements that are unaffected by mirror contamination.

Wavelength Modulation Spectroscopy (WMS) Signal DetectionSpectraSensors takes the fundamental absorption spectroscopy concept a step further by using a sophisticated signal detection technique called wavelength modulation spectroscopy (WMS). When employing WMS, the laser drive current is modulated with a kHz sine wave as the laser is rapidly tuned. A lock-in amplifier is then used to detect the harmonic component of the signal that is at twice the modulation frequency (2f), as shown in Figure 1–4. This phase-sensitive detection enables the filtering of low-frequency noise caused by turbulence in the sample gas, temperature and/or pressure fluctuations, low-frequency noise in the laser beam or thermal noise in the detector.

Figure 1–4 Typical normalized 2f signal where the species concentration is proportional to the peak height

With the resulting low-noise signal and use of fast post-processing algorithms, reliable parts per million (ppm) or parts per billion (ppb) detection levels are possible (depending on target and background species) at real-time response rates (on the order of 1 second).

All SpectraSensors TDL gas analyzers employ the same design and hardware platform. Measuring different trace gases in various mixed hydrocarbon background streams is accomplished by selecting a different optimum diode laser wavelength between 700-3000nm, which provides the least amount of sensitivity to background stream variations.

1–6 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

2 - INSTALLATION

This section describes the processes used to initially install and configure your 2-Pack analyzer system. Once the analyzer arrives, you should take a few minutes to examine the contents before installing the unit.

What Should be Included in the Shipping BoxThe contents of the crates should include:

• The SpectraSensors 2-Pack analyzer system

• CDs; Operator’s Manual and other operational instructions as necessary

• Two external serial cables

• Additional accessories or options as ordered.

If any of these contents are missing, contact your sales representative.

Inspecting the Analyzer and SCSUnpack and place the unit on a flat surface. Carefully inspect all enclosures for dents, dings, or general damage. Inspect the supply and return connections for damage, such as bent tubing. Report any damage to the carrier.

Each analyzer is custom configured with various accessories and options. If there is any discrepancy with the order, please contact your sales representative.

Getting Familiar with the AnalyzerFigure 2–1 shows the general configuration of a 2-Pack analyzer system. On the front panel of the top enclosures, the keypad and LCD display serve as the user interface to the analyzer. The top enclosures contain the electronics for the H2S and H2O analyzers. The H2S electronics (top left enclosure) control the H2S cell in the sample conditioning system (SCS) below. Refer to “About the SCS” on page 3-1 for a detailed discussion of this portion of the analyzer. The H2O electronics control the moisture cell.

Power is supplied to the analyzer via the exterior side panel of each analyzer electronics enclosure. The lower inlet provides for power to the system and the upper inlet is used for signal wiring connection. Refer to Figure 2–1.

Avoid jolting the instrument by dropping it or banging it against a hard surface which may disturb the optical alignment.


2-P

ack

H2 S

/H

2 O A

naly

zer S

yste

m

2–2

4900002006 rev. K

8-1

5-1

3

Figure 2–1 General system hardware outline *

* Refer to your system’s drawings for specific configuration.

Installation

F

F

F

F

A set of solenoid switching valves in the SCS (bottom enclosure) route the flow either directly (wet cycle) to the analyzer, or through a scrubber (dry cycle) and on to the analyzer.

Throughout this manual, instructions will refer to the installation, operation and maintenance of each analyzer as well as the SCS. Although these are unique and distinct units, they operate in unison and the combination comprise the SS2100 2-Pack analyzer system.

Analyzer electronics assemblyThe analyzer electronics assemblies are shown in Figure 2–2 and Figure 2–3 for the H2S analyzer, and Figure 2–4 and Figure 2–5 for the H2O analyzer. The analyzer power supply provides power to the analyzer control electronics. The analyzer control electronics drive the laser, collect the signal and analyze the spectra.

See Figure 2–2, Figure 2–3 [H2S] or Figure 2–4 and Figure 2–5 [H2O] for locating fuses. If you need to replace a fuse, use only the same type and rating of fuse as the original as listed in Table 2–1 and Table 2–2.

Table 2–1 H2S analyzer fuse specifications

Figure DWG Ref. Voltage Description Rating

igure 2–2 F1, F2120 VAC Miniature Fuse, 5 x 20 mm, Time Delay 250VAC/0.8A

240 VAC Miniature Fuse, 5 x 20 mm, Time Delay 250VAC/0.5A

igure 2–3 F3 24 VDC Miniature Fuse, 5 x 20 mm, Time Delay 250VAC/1.6A

Table 2–2 H2O analyzer fuse specifications

DWG Ref. Voltage Description Rating

igure 2–4 F1, F2120 VAC Miniature Fuse, 5 x 20 mm, Time Delay 250VAC/0.8A

240 VAC Miniature Fuse, 5 x 20 mm, Time Delay 250VAC/0.5A

igure 2–5 F3 24 VDC Miniature Fuse, 5 x 20 mm, Time Delay 250VAC/1.6A

!

V A



SIGNALS

ASSIGNABLEALARM

GENERAL FAULTALARM

NO

NC

COMMON

TB2

FUSES(F1,F2)

RELAY DRIVER &4-20 mA CONTROLBOARD STACK

TB3

Figure 2–2 H2S analyzer electronics control board (AC) showing signal terminal block and alarm relays

2–4 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

Installation

SIGNALS

ASSIGNABLEALARM

GENERAL FAULTALARM

NO

NC

COMMON

FUSE(F3)

RELAY DRIVER &4-20 mA CONTROLBOARD STACK

TB3

TB2

Figure 2–3 H2S analyzer electronics control board (DC) showing signal terminal block and alarm relays



J4

J3

J10

NC

COMMON

NO

SIGNALS

GENERAL FAULTALARM

ASSIGNABLEALARM

4-20 mA BOARD

TB2

FUSES(F1,F2)

Figure 2–4 H2O analyzer electronics control board (AC) showing signal terminal block and alarm relays

2–6 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

Installation

NC

COMMON

FUSE(F3)

NO

SIGNALS

GENERAL FAULTALARM

ASSIGNABLEALARM

4-20 mA BOARD

TB2

Figure 2–5 H2O analyzer electronics control board (DC) showing signal terminal block and alarm relays



Hardware and Tools for InstallationDepending on the particular configuration of accessories and options ordered, you may need the following hardware and tools to complete the installation process.

Hardware• Membrane separator filter (if not included)

• Pressure regulator (if not included)

• 3/8” Unistrut® (or equivalent) bolts and spring nuts

• Stainless steel tubing (SpectraSensors recommends using 1/4” O.D. x 0.035” wall thickness, seamless stainless steel tubing)

• 3/4” conduit hubs

• 3/4” conduit

• Source of plant nitrogen gas (4 SCFH) for purge unit(s), if applicable

• 3/8” x 1 1/2” machine screws and nuts

Tools• Hand drill and bits

• Tape measure

• Level

• Pencil

• 9/16” socket wrench

• Screw driver

• 9/16” open-end wrench

Mounting the AnalyzerThe 2-Pack analyzer system is manufactured for wall or Unistrut (or equivalent) metal framing installations. Depending on your application and configuration, the analyzer will typically come mounted on a Unistrut frame. Refer to Figure A–1 on page A–3 for mounting dimensions.

When mounting the analyzer, be sure not to position the instrument so that it is difficult to operate adjacent devices. Allow three feet (1 m) of room in front of the analyzer and any switches.

2–8 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

Installation

To mount the analyzer:1. Select a suitable location to mount the analyzer. Choose a shaded

area or use an optional analyzer hood (or equivalent) to minimize sun exposure.

2. Locate the mounting holes on your unit.

3. For wall installations, mark the centers of the top mounting holes. Mounting dimensions are shown in Figure A–1 on page A–3.

4. Drill the appropriate size holes for the screws you are using.

5. Hold the analyzer in place and fasten with the top screws.

6. Repeat for the bottom mounting holes.

Once all four screws are tightened the analyzer should be very secure and ready for the electrical connections.

Connecting Electrical Power to the AnalyzerDepending on your configuration, your analyzer will be set up for 120/240 VAC @ 50/60 Hz single phase input or optionally 18–24 VDC input. Check the manufacturing data label or the terminal block labels to determine the power input requirements. All work should be performed by personnel qualified in electrical conduit installation. Conduit seals should be used where appropriate in compliance with local regulations.

It is critical to mount the analyzer so that the supply and return lines reach the supply and return connections on the chassis while still maintaining flexibility so that the sample lines are not under excessive stress.

SpectraSensors analyzers are designed for operation within the specified ambient temperature range. Intense sun exposure in some areas may cause the analyzer temperature to exceed the maximum.

Hazardous voltage and risk of electric shock. Turn off and lock out system power before opening the electronics enclosure and making any connections.

Careful consideration should be taken when grounding. Properly ground the unit by connecting ground leads to the grounding studs provided throughout the system that are labeled with the ground symbol .



Depending on your configuration, the electrical wiring can typically be connected to the analyzer through the conduit hub(s) located at the bottom right or left of the electronics enclosure(s).

Units with an enclosure heater will have an additional power connection through a conduit hub located at the bottom right of the heated enclosure (see “Connecting Electrical Power to the Enclosure Heater” on page 2-12).

To connect electrical power to the analyzer:1. Open the analyzer electronics enclosure door. Take care not to

disturb the electrical assembly inside.

2. Run conduit from the power distribution panel to the conduit hub on the analyzer electronics enclosure labeled for power input.

3. For AC systems, pull ground, neutral and hot wires into the electronics enclosure.

For DC systems, pull ground, plus and minus wires.

4. Strip back the jacket and/or insulation of the wires just enough to connect to the power terminal block.

5. For single phase power connections, attach the neutral and hot wires to the power terminal block by connecting the neutral wire to the terminal marked “NEU” and the hot wire to the terminal marked “LINE,” as shown in Figure 2–6.

Failure to properly ground the analyzer may create a high-voltage shock hazard.

Conduit seals should be used where appropriate in compliance with local regulations.

Because the breaker in the power distribution panel or switch will be the primary means of disconnecting the power from the analyzer, the power distribution panel should be located in close proximity to the equipment and within easy reach of the operator, or within 10 feet of the analyzer.

An approved switch or circuit breaker rated for 15 amps should be used and clearly marked as the disconnecting device for the analyzer.

2–10 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

Installation

For AC split phase systems, attach the two hot legs to the terminal block by connecting one of the hot wires to the terminal marked “LINE 1" and the other hot wire to the terminal marked “LINE 2,” as shown in Figure 2–7.

Figure 2–6 AC single phase (120 VAC) connection terminal block in analyzer electronics enclosure

NEULINE

Figure 2–7 AC split phase (240 VAC) connection terminal block in electronics enclosure

LINE 1LINE 2



For DC systems, connect the minus wire to the terminal marked “-,” and the positive wire to the terminal marked “+,” as shown in Figure 2–8.

6. Connect the ground wire to the ground terminal marked .

7. Close and tighten the analyzer electronics enclosure door.

Field Interface Loads (Solenoid Valves)The SS2100 must be connected to a certified solenoid having a temperature code of T4, T5, or T6 at a maximum ambient temperature of +60°F.

Connecting Electrical Power to the Enclosure HeaterUnits with an enclosure heater will have an additional power connection through a conduit hub located at the bottom right of the enclosure.

Figure 2–8 DC connection (24 VDC) terminal block in analyzer electronics enclosure

–

+

2–12 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

Installation

To connect electrical power to the enclosure heater:1. Open the heated enclosure door. Take care not to disturb anything

inside.

2. Open the power terminal box inside the heated enclosure, as shown in Figure 2–9 for 120 VAC or Figure 2–10 for 240 VAC connection.

3. Run conduit from the power distribution panel to the conduit hub on the lower right side of the heated enclosure labeled for power input.

Failure to properly ground the analyzer may create a high-voltage shock hazard.


TERMINAL4

TERMINAL5

NEU

TERMINAL6

LINE

Figure 2–9 AC connection terminal block for 120 VAC enclosure heater



4. Pull ground, neutral and hot wires (#14 AWG minimum) into the power terminal box inside the heated enclosure.

5. Strip back the jacket and/or insulation of the wires just enough to connect to the power terminal block.

6. Attach the neutral and hot wires to the power terminal by connecting the neutral wire to the terminal marked “N” or “NEU,” the hot wire to the terminal marked “H” or “LINE,” as shown in Figure 2–9 and Figure 2–10.

7. Connect the ground wire to the ground terminal marked “G” or .

8. Close the power terminal box.

9. Close and latch the heated enclosure door.

Because the breaker in the power distribution panel or switch will be the primary means of disconnecting the power from the analyzer, the power distribution panel or switch should be located in close proximity to the equipment and within easy reach of the operator.

An approved switch or circuit breaker rated for 15 amps should be used and clearly marked as the disconnecting device for the analyzer.

Figure 2–10 AC connection terminal block for 240 VAC enclosure heater

GROUNDTERMINAL

NEU TERMINAL

LINE TERMINAL

2–14 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

Installation

Connecting the Output Signals and AlarmsThe 4-20 mA current loop and serial output for each channel are supplied from mating terminal blocks (TB2) located inside the respective analyzer electronics enclosures, as shown in Figure 2–2 and Figure 2–3 [H2S] or Figure 2–4 and Figure 2–5 [H2O]. By default, the 4-20 mA current loop outputs are factory set to source current.

The Assignable Alarm and General Fault Alarm for each channel (H2S or H2O) trigger SPDT relays located inside the respective analyzer electronics enclosures. The relay for the Assignable Alarm for each channel is configured to be normally de-energized with the dry contact changing state on alarm. The Assignable Alarm outputs can be wired for OPEN or CLOSED depending on which terminals are used normally open (NO) or normally closed (NC).

The relay for the General Fault Alarm for each channel is configured to be fail-safe (or normally energized) so the dry contact will open in the event of power loss or General Fault Alarm. Thus, the cables for each General Fault Alarm should be wired to the common and NO terminals.

Connections can be made with customer-supplied cables for the current loops and alarms and factory-supplied cables for the serial connections. Consult the wiring diagram in Figure A–4 on page A–6.

To connect the H2S analyzer signal and alarm cables:1. Disconnect power from the analyzer and open the H2S electronics

enclosure cover. Take care not to disturb the electrical assembly inside.

2. Run conduit from the signal/alarm receiving station to the conduit hub in the upper left-hand corner of the H2S analyzer electronics enclosure labeled for signal input/output.

3. Pull the customer-supplied cables for the current loop and alarms and the SpectraSensors external serial cable (included in the shipping box) through the conduit into the H2S analyzer electronics enclosure.

4. Strip back the jacket and insulation of the current loop and serial cable just enough to connect to the mating terminal block, shown in

The 4-20 mA current loop output is factory set to source current. To change the 4-20 mA current loop output from source to sink, refer to “Changing the 4-20 mA Current Loop Mode” on page 2-19.




Figure 2–11. The mating terminal block can be pulled up and removed from its base to make the cable connection process easier.

5. Connect the 4-20 mA current loop and validation request (if applicable) signal wires to the appropriate terminals, as indicated in Table 2–3.

6. Connect the serial cable wires to the appropriate terminals according to Table 2–3. For reference, Table 2–3 also shows the corresponding pin numbers for configuring a nine-pin Sub-D connector for connection to a computer serial port.

Table 2–3 H2S analyzer input/output signal connections

Terminal Description D-Conn Color

1 Serial RX Pin-3 Black

2 Serial TX Pin-2 Red

3 COM Serial Ground Pin-5 Shield

4 N/C

5 N/C

6 Current Loop +

7 Current Loop -

8 N/C

9 N/C

10 N/C

11 N/C

12 N/C

Figure 2–11 Mating terminal block (TB2) for connecting signal cables

TB2

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

2–16 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

Installation

7. Re-insert the mating terminal block into its base and verify that each connection is secure.

8. Strip back the jacket and insulation of the alarm cables just enough to connect to the alarm relays, shown in Figure 2–2 or Figure 2–3.

9. Connect the cable for the General Fault Alarm to the common and NO terminals on the corresponding relays shown in Figure 2–2 or Figure 2–3.

10. Connect the cable for the Assignable Alarm to the common and NO or NC terminals (for OPEN or CLOSED, respectively, when activated) on the corresponding relay shown in Figure 2–2 or Figure 2–3.

11. Close and tighten the H2S analyzer electronics enclosure cover.

12. To complete the connections, connect the other end of the current loop wires to a current loop receiver, the external serial cable to a serial port on your computer and the alarm cables to the appropriate alarm monitors.

To connect the H2O analyzer signal and alarm cables:1. Disconnect power from the analyzer and open the electronics


2. Run conduit from the signal/alarm receiving station to the conduit hub in the upper right-hand corner of the H2O analyzer electronics enclosure.

3. Pull the customer-supplied cables for the current loop and alarms and the SpectraSensors external serial cable (included in the shipping box) through the conduit into the H2O analyzer electronics enclosure.

4. Strip back the jacket and insulation of the current loop and serial cable just enough to connect to the mating terminal block, shown in Figure 2–11. The mating terminal block can be pulled up and removed from its base to make the cable connection process easier.

5. Connect the 4-20 mA current loop signal wires to the appropriate terminals, as indicated in Table 2–4.

6. Connect the serial cable wires to the appropriate terminals according to Table 2–4. For reference, Table 2–4 also shows the corresponding pin numbers for configuring a nine-pin Sub-D connector for connection to a computer serial port.




7. Re-insert the mating terminal block into its base and verify that each connection is secure.

8. Strip back the jacket and insulation of the alarm cables just enough to connect to the alarm relays, shown in Figure 2–4 or Figure 2–5.

9. Connect the cable for each General Fault Alarm to the common and NO terminals on the corresponding relays shown in Figure 2–4 or Figure 2–5.

10. Connect the cable for the Assignable Alarm to the common and NO or NC terminals (for OPEN or CLOSED, respectively, when activated) on the corresponding relay shown in Figure 2–4 or Figure 2–5.

11. Close and tighten the H2O analyzer electronics enclosure door.

12. To complete the connections, connect the other end of the current loop wires to a current loop receiver, the external serial cable to a serial port on your computer and the alarm cables to the appropriate alarm monitors.

Table 2–4 H2O analyzer input/output signal connections

Terminal Description D-Conn Color

1 Serial RX Pin-3 Black

2 Serial TX Pin-2 Red

3 COM Serial Ground Pin-5 Shield

4 N/C

5 N/C

6 Current Loop +

7 Current Loop -

8 N/C

9 N/C

10 N/C

11 N/C

12 N/C

2–18 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

Installation

Changing the 4-20 mA Current Loop Mode

By default, the 4-20 mA current loop output is factory set to source current. In some instances it may be necessary to change the 4-20 mA current loop output in the field from source to sink. The work must be performed by personnel qualified in electronics assembly.

To change the H2S analyzer 4-20 mA board from source to sink:1. Disconnect power from the analyzer and open the electronics


2. Locate the relay control board in the upper right of the electronics enclosure, as shown in Figure 2–2 and Figure 2–3.

3. Unscrew the four mounting screws, shown in Figure 2–12, holding the relay driver board to four stand-offs.

4. Gently pull the relay driver board to the side to expose the 4-20 mA board, as shown in Figure 2–12.

5. Disconnect the 10-pin (J1) connector from the 4-20 mA board, unscrew the four stand-offs and remove the board from the back panel.

6. Move the jumper (JMP1) connecting the center pin to pin “A,” shown in Figure 2–13, to connect the center pin with pin “P.”

7. Re-install the board on the panel and connect the 10-pin (J1) connector.

8. Re-install the relay control board.

9. Reconnect power to the H2S analyzer. Confirm the 4 mA (min.) and 20 mA (max.) points (see “To scale the current loop signal” on page 4-34).

10. Close and tighten the H2S analyzer electronics enclosure cover.

Changing of the current loop mode may negate specific hazardous area certifications. Contact your factory service representative for details.

Hazardous voltage and risk of electric shock. Turn off and lock out system power before opening the electronics enclosure and servicing.



4-20 mA BOARD

RELAY CONTROLBOARD

MOUNTINGSCREW (X4)

STAND-OFFSCREW (X4)

Figure 2–12 H2S analyzer relay driver and 4-20 mA board stack

ZERO (4 mA)ADJUST

SPAN (20 mA)ADJUST

JMP1

J1

Figure 2–13 4-20 mA board

2–20 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

Installation

To change the H2O analyzer 4-20 mA board from source to sink:1. Open the electronics enclosure cover. Take care not to disturb the

electrical assembly inside.

2. Locate the 4-20 mA board in the center of the electronics enclosure, as shown in Figure 2–4 and Figure 2–5.

3. Disconnect the 10-pin (J1) connector from the 4-20 mA board, unscrew the four stand-offs and remove the board from the back panel.

4. Move the jumper (JMP1) connecting the center pin to pin “A,” shown in Figure 2–13, to connect the center pin with pin “P.”

5. Re-install the board on the panel and connect the 10-pin (J1) connector.

6. Reconnect power to the H2O analyzer. Confirm the 4 mA (min.) and 20 mA (max.) points (see “To scale the current loop signal” on page 7-20).

7. Close and tighten the H2O analyzer electronics enclosure cover.

Connecting the Gas LinesOnce you have verified that the analyzer is functional and that the analyzer circuit is de-energized, you are ready to connect the supply and return lines. All work should be performed by technicians qualified in pneumatic tubing.

SpectraSensors recommends using 1/4” O.D x 0.035” wall thickness, seamless stainless steel tubing. Refer to the system layout drawing in Figure A–1 on page A–3 for supply and return port locations.

To connect the sample supply lines:1. First confirm that each sample probe is correctly installed at the

process supply tap and that each sample probe isolation valve is closed.

Process samples may contain hazardous material in potentially flammable and/or toxic concentrations. Personnel should have a thorough knowledge and understanding of the physical properties and safety precautions for the sample contents before installing the SCS.

The process sample at the sample tap may be at a high pressure. Use extreme caution when operating the sample probe isolation valve and field sample reducing pressure regulator.



2. Also, confirm that each field pressure reducing station is installed properly at the sample probe and that the pressure regulator at each field pressure reducing station is closed (adjustment knob turned fully counterclockwise).

3. Check that each relief valve vent line is properly installed from the field pressure reducing station to the low pressure flare or atmospheric vent connection.

4. Determine appropriate tubing route from the field pressure reducing station to the SCS.

5. Run stainless steel tubing from each field pressure reducing station (set for the specified supply pressure, refer to Figure A–3 on page A–5) to the corresponding sample supply port of the SCS. Bend tubing using industrial grade benders, check tubing fit to ensure proper seating between the tubing and fittings. Fully ream all tubing ends. Blow out the lines for 10–15 seconds with clean, dry nitrogen or air prior to making the connection.

6. Connect each sample supply tube to the SCS using the 1/4” stainless steel compression-type fitting provided.

7. Tighten all new fittings 1-1/4 turns with a wrench from finger tight. For connections with previously swaged ferrules, thread the nut to the previously pulled up position, then tighten slightly with a wrench. Secure tubing to appropriate structural supports as required.

8. Check all connections for gas leaks. SpectraSensors recommends using a liquid leak detector.

To connect the sample/bypass returns:1. Confirm that the low pressure flare or atmospheric vent header shut-

off valve is closed.

2. Determine appropriate tubing route from the SCS to the low pressure flare or atmospheric vent header.

All valves, regulators, switches, etc. should be operated in accordance with site lock-out/tag-out procedures.

Do not exceed 10 psig (0.7 barg) in sample cell. Damage to cell may result.


2–22 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

Installation

3. Run stainless steel tubing from the sample return ports to the low pressure flare or atmospheric vent header connection. Bend tubing using industrial grade benders, check tubing fit to ensure proper seating between the tubing and fittings. Fully ream all tubing ends. Blow out the lines for 10–15 seconds with clean, dry nitrogen or air prior to making the connection.

4. Connect the sample/bypass return tube to the SCS using the 1/4” stainless steel compression-type fittings provided.

5. Tighten all new fittings 1-1/4 turns with a wrench from finger tight. For connections with previously swaged ferrules, thread the nut to the previously pulled up position, then tighten slightly with a wrench. Secure tubing to appropriate structural supports as required.


7. Be sure to vent any pressure relief vent ports (if applicable) and/or DBB valve vent ports (if applicable) in a similar fashion when the unit is in use.

To connect the pneumatic valve source (if applicable):1. Determine appropriate tubing route from the customer-supplied

instrument air or nitrogen control gas source [50 psig (3.4 barg) min. to 100 psig (6.9 barg) max] to the SCS.

2. Run stainless steel tubing from the customer-supplied regulator [50 psig (3.4 barg) min. to 100 psig (6.9 barg) max] to the pneumatic valve instrument air supply port.

3. Bend tubing using industrial grade benders, check tubing fit to ensure proper seating between the tubing and fittings.

4. Fully ream all tubing ends. Blow out the lines for 10–15 seconds with clean, dry nitrogen or air prior to making the connection.

5. Connect the control gas tube to the SCS using the 1/4” stainless steel compression-type union fitting provided.

6. Tighten all new fittings 1-1/4 turns with a wrench from finger tight.

a. For connections with previously swaged ferrules, thread the nut to the previously pulled up position, then tighten slightly with a wrench. Secure tubing to appropriate structural supports as required.





Application of Conduit Lubricant To ensure proper installation, SpectraSensors recommends using STL8 screw thread lubricant or equivalent on all conduit screw thread and its tapped opening.

STL8 Screw Thread Lubricant is a lithium based, anti-galling substance with excellent adhesion that maintains rain-tightness and grounding continuity between conduit fittings. This lubricant has proven very effective between parts made of dissimilar metals, and is stable in temperatures from -20° F to +300° F.

1. Holding the fitting piece at one end, generously apply the lubricant on the male threaded surface (at least five threads wide) as shown below.

2. Screw the female pipe thread onto the male fitting until the lubricated threads are engaged.

Do not use this lubricant on exposed current-carrying parts.

Eyes: May cause minor irritation.

Skin: May cause minor irritation.

Ingestion: Relatively non-toxic. Ingestion may result in a laxative effect. Ingestion of substantial quantities may cause lithium toxicity.

2–24 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

Installation

Connecting the Validation Gas (If Applicable)For systems with validation, an appropriate validation gas source will need to be connected to the SCS.

To connect the validation source:1. Determine appropriate tubing route from the customer-supplied

validation gas source to the SCS.

2. Run stainless steel tubing from the validation source (regulated to the specified pressure) to the validation gas supply port.

3. Bend tubing using industrial grade benders, check tubing fit to ensure proper seating between the tubing and fittings.

4. Fully ream all tubing ends. Blow out the lines for 10–15 seconds with clean, dry nitrogen or air prior to making the connection.

5. Connect the validation source tube to the SCS using the 1/4” stainless steel compression-type fittings provided.

6. Tighten all new fittings 1-1/4 turns with a wrench from finger tight.

a. For connections with previously swaged ferrules, thread the nut to the previously pulled up position, then tighten slightly with a wrench. Secure tubing to appropriate structural supports as required.


8. Repeat for additional validation gasses (if applicable).

Conditioning the SCS TubingNewly installed systems invariably have some trace contaminants and/or are intended for measuring trace amounts of gas constituents that tend to cling to system walls resulting erroneous readings if the constituents are not in equilibrium with the system walls. Therefore, once the analyzer and SCS are completely connected, the entire system (i.e., from the sample source valve to the vent or return) should be conditioned by flowing sample gas through the system for up to 12 hours (or until the reading stabilizes) after the system is powered up and before actual readings are taken. Progress of the system conditioning can be monitored via the gas concentration readings. Once the gas constituents have reached equilibrium with the system walls, the readings should stabilize.




THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

2–26 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

3 - SAMPLE CONDITIONING SYSTEM

The Sample Conditioning System (SCS) has been specifically designed to deliver a sample stream to the analyzer that is representative of the process at the time of sampling. To ensure the integrity of the sample stream and its analysis, care must be taken to install and operate the SCS properly. Therefore, any personnel intending to operate or service the analyzer and SCS should have a thorough understanding of the process application and the design of the analyzer and SCS.

Most problems experienced with sample systems tend to result from operating the system differently than intended. In some cases, the actual process conditions may be different than originally specified (e.g., flow rates, presence of contaminants, particulates, or condensables that may only exist under upset conditions). By establishing understanding of the application and the design of the system, most issues can be avoided altogether or easily diagnosed and corrected ensuring successful normal operation.

If there are any remaining questions concerning the design, operation, or maintenance of the SCS, contact SpectraSensors technical services group.

About the SCSSpectraSensors’ Sample Conditioning Systems (SCS) are designed to filter incoming gas, as well as control pressure and flow to the analyzer. The SCS uses a 7-micron particulate filter and a membrane separator that removes entrained liquids or particles from the natural gas stream before they enter the analyzer. Because SpectraSensors’ analyzers are immune to vapor phase contaminants found in natural gas, using the particulate filter and membrane separator prevents any contamination of the analyzer.

Personnel should have a thorough understanding of the operation of the H2S & H2O analyzer and the procedures presented here before operating the sample conditioning system.

The process sample at the sample tap may be at a high pressure. A pressure reducing regulator is located at the sample tap to reduce the sample pressure and allow operation of the sample conditioning system at a low pressure. Use extreme caution when operating the sample probe isolation valve and field pressure reducing regulator.

Process samples may contain hazardous material in potentially flammable and/or toxic concentrations. Personnel should have a thorough knowledge and understanding of the physical properties and safety precautions for the sample contents before operating the SCS.



The membrane separator is a three-port device. When gas enters the separator inlet, only the vapors will pass through the membrane to the outlet. The outlet flow passes through a flow control valve and a flowmeter to the analyzer. Blocked liquids or particles can be flushed from the separator housing out the bypass port.

If the correct probe and regulator is used at the sample extraction point, and the sample transport line is heated to prevent condensation, no liquids or particles should reach the SCS. Under normal conditions, the membrane separator will remove very little liquid, if any. The main purpose of the separator will be to protect the analyzer in the case of an upset condition.

Besides filtering the incoming gas, the SCS is also responsible for controlling flow and pressure to the analyzer. An instrument grade pressure regulator is used to set the final pressure of the gas before it enters the analyzer. There is one flowmeter for the flow path to the analyzer and one flowmeter for the flow path of the bypass. The flowmeters have a built-in flow controller to set flow rates to the recommended values (see Table A–1 for proper flow and pressure settings).

Most analyzers are equipped with a validation port. The validation port is used to connect a reference gas to verify that the analyzer is working properly. See “Validating the Analyzer” on page 4-40 (H2S) or page 7–21 (H2O).

Typically the SCS is assembled inside of an overall stainless steel enclosure, which is insulated and heated using a temperature controller. This ensures that the sample remains in a stable vapor phase and improves the measurement performance.

In some cases other types of components are included in the SCS, such as coalescing filters, liquid knock-outs, pumps, special heaters and other special components that are application dependant. Refer to Figure A–1 on page A–3 for a general overview of the system configuration. For your specific system configuration, refer to your as-built drawings.

Checking the SCS InstallationThe integral SCS is factory set with the appropriate pressures, flow rates, and enclosure temperature, as indicated in the as-built drawings. However, before operating the system for the first time, a careful check of the installation of the entire SCS from the sample probe to the flare/vent is recommended.

To perform SCS installation checks:1. Confirm that the sample probe is correctly installed at the process

supply tap and that the sample probe isolation valve is closed.

2. Confirm that the field pressure reducing station is installed properly at the sample probe.

3–2 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

Sample Conditioning System

3. Confirm that the relief valve at the field pressure reducing station has been set to the specified setpoint. The relief valve is located on the pressure reducing regulator at the process sample tap.

4. Confirm that the relief valve vent line is properly installed from the field pressure reducing station to the low pressure flare or atmospheric connection.

5. If applicable, confirm that the sample probe and field pressure reducing station are properly traced and insulated without any exposed surfaces.

6. If applicable, confirm that the field run electric-traced sample transport tubing is installed correctly (no exposed tubing or pockets), terminated properly at each end, and that each line has been purged clean and pressure tested.

7. Confirm that all valves are closed and all switches are off.

8. Confirm that the AC power is available to the electrically traced sample tubing (if applicable), analyzer, and SCS but that the local switches are off.

9. Confirm that the field analog and alarm signal wiring is interconnected properly (see “To connect the H2S analyzer signal and alarm cables” on page 2-15 and “To connect the H2O analyzer signal and alarm cables” on page 2-17).

10. Confirm that the low pressure flare or atmospheric vent is properly connected, if applicable.

11. Confirm that the analyzer house atmospheric vent is properly installed, if applicable.

12. Confirm that all sample system tubing has been thoroughly leak checked.

Starting up the SCSAfter the SCS installation has been thoroughly checked, you are ready to begin preparing for initial SCS startup.

To prepare for SCS startup:1. Confirm that all AC power switches for the analyzer and SCS are off.

Although the relief valve has been preset, the setpoint must be confirmed prior to operation of the sample system. To confirm or reset the relief valve, it must be removed from the pressure reducing regulator and connected to an adjustable pressure source (refer to the manufacturer's instructions for details on setting the relief valve). After the relief valve is re-installed, all connections must be leak checked.



2. If applicable, apply AC power to the electric-traced sample transport tubing at the tracer control system.

3. If applicable, confirm that the sample supply line electric tracer temperature controller at the tracer control system is set to the temperature specified and that the sample supply line tracer is heating to the specified temperature.

4. Confirm that the sample probe isolation valve is closed.

5. Confirm that the pressure regulator at the field pressure reducing station is closed (adjustment knob turned fully counterclockwise).

6. Confirm that all sample system shut-off valves are closed.

7. Confirm that the sample bypass and analyzer flowmeter metering valves are closed (adjustment knob turned clockwise). Do not over-tighten the metering valves or damage could occur.

To start up the sample system heater:1. Turn on AC power to the sample system heater.

2. After sufficient warm-up time (5-8 hours), confirm that the sample system enclosure is heated to the specified temperature (see Table A–1 on page A–1 and Figure A–3 on page A–5) by observing the temperature reading on the door mounted thermometer.

To start up the field pressure reducing station:

1. Open the low pressure flare or atmospheric vent header shut-off valve for the relief valve vent from the field pressure reducing station.

If applicable, personnel should have a thorough understanding of the operation of the tracer power supply and control system before operating the SCS.

The entire analyzer system is calibrated for operation at the enclosure temperature specified. Measurements should be considered valid only when the enclosure is at the specified temperature.

The process sample at the sample tap may be at a high pressure. Use extreme caution when operating the sample probe isolation valve and field pressure reducing regulator.

3–4 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13


2. Slowly open the sample probe process shut-off valve at the sample supply tap.

3. Slowly open the pressure regulator at the field pressure reducing station (adjustment knob turned clockwise) and set the pressure regulator to the specified pressure.

To start up the sample bypass stream on process sample:1. Open the low pressure flare or atmospheric vent header shut-off

valve for the bypass flow effluent from the SCS.

2. Open the sample supply port shut-off valve.

3. Open the bypass flowmeter metering valve to establish sample flow from the sample probe and set the metering valve to the specified value.

4. Confirm that the sample supply pressure under flowing conditions is approximately set to the specified pressure.

To start up the analyzer on process sample:1. Open the low pressure flare or atmospheric vent header shut-off

valve for the sample flow effluent from the SCS.

2. Open the sample flowmeter metering valves to approximately the specified flow for each measurement cell.

3. If required, adjust each sample pressure regulator to the specified setpoint for each measurement cell.

The low pressure flare or atmospheric vent header shut-off valve must be “car-sealed” open and tagged as a relief valve vent so that this valve will not be closed unless the SCS is not in operation.

Although the exact supply pressure setpoint is not critical, the pressure at the sample system should be within 5 psig of the specified supply pressure setpoint. There may be a difference between the pressure readings at the sample tap and inside the SCS due to the pressure drop in the sample transport line under flowing conditions. If the pressure at the SCS under flowing conditions is not sufficiently close to the specified setpoint, it will be necessary to readjust the pressure regulator setpoint at the field pressure reducing station to provide the required supply pressure with the specified sample bypass flow.



4. Adjust the sample flowmeter metering valves to the specified flows for the measurement cells.

5. Confirm the sample flow and pressure setpoints and readjust the metering valves and pressure regulator at the field pressure reducing station to the specified setpoints, if necessary.

6. Confirm the sample bypass flow and readjust the bypass metering valve to the specified setpoint, if necessary. The SCS is now operating with the process sample.

7. Power up the analyzers according to the procedure given for the H2S analyzer in “To power up the analyzer” on page 4-1 or for the H2O analyzer in “To power up the analyzer” on page 7-1).

Shutting Down the SCS

The adjustment setpoints of the analyzer flowmeters and pressure regulators will be interactive and may require readjustment multiple times until the final setpoints are obtained.

The analyzer system has been designed for the sample flow rate specified. A lower than specified sample flow rate may adversely affect analyzer performance. If you are unable to attain the specified sample flow rate, contact your factory sales representative.


The process sample at the sample tap is at a high pressure. A pressure reducing regulator is located at the sample tap to reduce the sample pressure and enable operation of the SCS at a low pressure. Use extreme caution when operating the sample probe isolation valve and field pressure reducing regulator.


3–6 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13


To isolate the measurement sample cell for short-term shutdown:The analyzer can be isolated from the primary sample bypass section for short-term shutdown or maintenance of the analyzer while allowing the sample bypass flow to continue in a steady-state mode.

1. Close the sample flowmeter metering valve (adjustment knob turned clockwise) for each measurement channel. Do not over-tighten the metering valves or damage could occur.

2. Allow any residual gas to flow out of the measurement cells.

3. Close the low pressure flare or atmospheric vent header shut-off valve for the effluent from each measurement cell.

To isolate the SCS for short-term shutdown:The SCS can be isolated from the process sample tap for short-term shutdown or maintenance of the SCS without requiring the shutdown of the field pressure reducing station.

Due to the high pressure of the process sample, it is advisable to allow the sample bypass flow to continue during short-term isolation of the analyzer. Continuing sample bypass flow allows the field pressure regulator to continue normal operation without possible overpressure and activation of the relief valve in the event the pressure regulator leaks when the downstream flow is discontinued.

If the system will not be out of service for an extended period, it is advised that power remain applied to the sample transport line electric tracer, if applicable, and the sample system enclosure heater.




1. Isolate the analyzer from the bypass following the procedure under “To isolate the measurement sample cell for short-term shutdown” on page 3-7.

2. Close the sample supply shut-off valve to the SCS.

3. Allow the sample bypass to flow until all residual gas has dissipated from the lines as indicated by no flow on the sample bypass flowmeter.

4. If applicable, connect a nitrogen purge line to the nitrogen purge port making sure not to exceed the maximum sample supply pressure specification shown on the schematic in the as-built drawings. Make sure there is a check valve in the line to prevent sample gas from contaminating the purge system. Open the nitrogen purge port valve and purge the system with nitrogen for 10 minutes then turn off the nitrogen purge port valve.

5. Close the low pressure flare or atmospheric vent header shut-off valve for the effluent from the sample bypass.

6. Turn off power to the analyzer.

To isolate the process sample tap for long-term shutdown:If the SCS is to be out of service for an extended period, the SCS must be isolated at the process sample tap.

Although the pressure reducing regulator at the process sample tap is designed for “bubble-tight” shut off, this condition may not occur after the system has been in operation for an extended period. Isolation of the SCS from the field pressure regulator will discontinue sample flow and may cause the pressure at the outlet of the field pressure regulator to slowly increase if “bubble-tight” shut off of the pressure regulator does not occur. The slow pressure increase will continue until the pressure setpoint of the relief valve is reached and the excess pressure is vented by the relief valve. Although this situation is not intended, it does not cause a significant problem if the SCS is only isolated for a short period. Only a small amount of process sample will be vented when the relief valve opens because the pressure regulator will continue to act as a flow restriction.

If the system will not be out of service for an extended period, it is advised that power remain applied to the sample transport line electric tracer, if applicable, and the sample system enclosure heater.

3–8 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13


1. Isolate the analyzer from the bypass following the procedure under “To isolate the measurement sample cell for short-term shutdown” on page 3-7.

2. Confirm flow in the sample bypass flowmeter (the actual flow is not critical).

3. Close the sample probe process shut-off valve at the sample supply process tap.

4. Allow pressure in the field pressure reducing regulator to dissipate until only a low residual pressure is indicated on the pressure gauge at the field station.

5. Close the low pressure flare or atmospheric vent header shut-off valve for the relief valve vent from the field pressure regulator.

6. Close the field pressure reducing regulator (adjustment knob turned fully counterclockwise).

7. Close the sample supply shut-off valve to the SCS.

8. Close the sample bypass flowmeter metering valve (adjustment knob turned clockwise). Do not over-tighten the metering valve or damage could occur.

9. Close the low pressure flare or atmospheric vent header shut-off valve for the effluent from the sample bypass.

10. Turn off power to the analyzer.

The process sample at the sample tap may be at a high pressure. A pressure reducing regulator is located at the sample tap to reduce the sample pressure and allow operation of the SCS at a low pressure. Use extreme caution when operating the sample probe isolation valve and field pressure reducing regulator.

The sample transport line must be vented to the low pressure flare or atmospheric vent header through the bypass flowmeter to avoid pressure surges. The procedure given in the following steps can be followed regardless of whether or not the SCS has been isolated from the process tap as described in the previous section.




11. Turn off the AC power to the SCS heater and the sample tracer, if applicable, at the power distribution panel.

Periodic SCS Maintenance

The status of the SCS should be checked regularly to confirm proper operation (pressures, flows, etc.) and detect potential problems or failures before damage occurs. If maintenance is required, isolate the part of the system to be serviced by following the appropriate procedure under “Shutting Down the SCS” on page 3-6.

All filter elements should be checked periodically for loading. Obstruction of a filter element can be observed by a decreasing supply pressure or bypass flow. If loading of a filter is observed, the filter should be cleaned and the filter element replaced. After observation for some time, a regular schedule can be determined for replacement of filter elements.

No other regularly scheduled maintenance should be required for the system.

Preventive and Demand SCS Maintenance

Preventive and demand maintenance will be required when components and parts deteriorate or fail as a result of continuous use. The performance of the entire SCS and individual components should be monitored regularly so that maintenance may be performed on a scheduled basis in order to prevent a failure that could take the system out of operation.

The SCS is designed for convenient removal and replacement of component parts. Complete spare components should always be available. In general, if a problem or failure occurs, the complete part should be removed and replaced

Although power could be shut off to the sample supply electric tracer, it is advisable to allow this line to remain heated unless the SCS is to be out of service for an extended period or maintenance is required on the line.

Due to the chemical properties of the process samples, care must be taken to repair or replace components with proper materials of construction. Maintenance personnel should have a thorough knowledge and understanding of the chemical characteristics of the process before performing maintenance on the SCS.


3–10 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13


to limit system down time. Some components may be repaired (replacement of seats and seals, etc.) and then reused.

Under a process upset condition, it is possible for liquid to enter the sample probe and sample transport tubing. Normally, this liquid should purge from the sample transport line and be trapped in a coalescing filter upstream of the analyzer.

If the sample supply line does not appear to completely clear during normal operation, it may be necessary to clean the sample transport line to remove any liquid that may adhere to the wall of the tubing. The sample transport line must be disconnected at both ends to allow cleaning. After cleaning, the line should be purged dry with air or nitrogen before the system is placed back in operation.

If liquid makes it into the analyzer SCS, a filter element may become obstructed leading to a decreasing supply pressure or bypass flow. If obstruction of a filter is observed, the filter should be cleaned and the filter element replaced.

Servicing the H2S Scrubber

The H2S scrubber contains material that gradually loses its scrubbing ability with use. The lifetime of the material depends on how much H2S flows through the scrubber (gas composition) and how often (switching frequency). Thus, scrubber lifetime is very application specific.

The SpectraSensors 2-Pack analyzer system predicts the remaining scrubber capacity by using the actual H2S concentration measurements and dry cycle durations to calculate how much cumulative H2S has been removed by the scrubber. Scrubber lifetimes have been simulated for typical natural gas and fuel gas applications. As shown in Figure 3–1, under normal operating conditions, a 2” scrubber in a natural gas application with an average H2S concentration of 4 ppmv will last for many years, whereas a 3” scrubber in a fuel gas application with an average H2S concentration of 100 ppmv would be expected to last on the order of 190 days.

The system must be taken out of service during any cleaning of the sample transport line.




As an added precaution, a scrubber efficiency indicator, shown in Figure 3–2, is mounted at the outlet of the scrubber. The powder material in the scrubber efficiency indicator changes color from turquoise to dark grey if there is any H2S breakthrough, as shown in Figure 3–3. Alternatively, regular validation of the system with an appropriate gas standard will indicate when the scrubber needs to be replaced.

The system will activate a New Scrubber Alarm fault, which triggers the General Fault Alarm to indicate when it is time to replace the scrubber and scrubber efficiency indicator. Once the scrubber and scrubber efficiency indicator have been replaced, reset the scrubber lifetime monitor with the New Scrub Installed parameter and the General Fault Alarm with the Reset option for the General Alarm DO parameter (see “To change parameters in Mode 2” on page 4-13).

When specifying gas standards, indicate H2S in methane balance. For a measured range of 0-20 ppm, a concentration of 4-16 ppm is recommended.

Figure 3–1 Predicted scrubber lifetime based on average H2S load

20

0

40

60

80

100

20

0

40

60

80

100

RE

MA

ININ

G C

AP

AC

ITY

(%)

0 100 200 300 400 500 600

DAYS

4 ppmv, 2” Scrubber100 ppmv, 3” Scrubber

3–12 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13


If scrubber replacement is necessary, follow the procedure below. Replacement scrubbers, scrubber efficiency indicators, and other replacement parts can be ordered by the part numbers listed in “Spare Parts” on page A-7.

To replace the scrubber and scrubber efficiency indicator:1. Close the sample supply shut-off valve.

2. Allow all residual gas to dissipate as indicated by no flow on the sample bypass flowmeter.

3. Unscrew the compression nuts on the inlet end of the scrubber and scrubber efficiency indicator assembly.

4. To install the new scrubber and indicator, insert the inlet and outlet tubes into the compression fittings of a new scrubber and scrubber efficiency indicator assembly, ensuring each are oriented correctly, according to the flow pattern shown in Figure 3–2.

5. Tighten all new fittings 1-1/4 turns with a wrench from finger tight. For connections with previously swaged ferrules, thread the nut to the previously pulled up position, then tighten slightly with a wrench.


FL

OW

SCRUBBER

SCRUBBEREFFICIENCYINDICATOR

Figure 3–2 Scrubber and scrubber efficiency indicator



6. Reset the scrubber lifetime monitor with the New Scrub Installed parameter and the General Fault Alarm with the Reset option for the General Alarm DO parameter (see “To change parameters in Mode 2” on page 4-13).

7. Restart the SCS.


9. Re-validate the system with an appropriate gas standard following the instructions under “Validating the Analyzer” on page 4-40.

10. Purge the scrubber and scrubber efficiency indicator assembly with nitrogen to remove all flammable gas and cap the inlet and outlet.

H2S scrubbers and scrubber indicators contain Copper (II) Oxide [CAS# 1317-38-0] and basic cupric carbonate [CAS# 12069-69-1], which are harmful if swallowed and toxic to aquatic organisms. Handle with care and avoid contact with the internal substances.

Figure 3–3 H2S scrubber/dryer efficiency indicator before and after breakthrough

After breakthroughBefore breakthrough

3–14 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13


Disposal of Used Scrubbers

1. Discard used scrubber and scrubber indicator in appropriate receptacle.

Depleted H2S scrubbers and scrubber indicators contain predominantly Copper (II) Sulfide [CAS# 1317-40-4] with some remaining Copper (II) Oxide [CAS# 1317-38-0] and basic cupric carbonate [CAS# 12069-69-1], which are odorless dark powders. The scrubber and scrubber indicator require few special precautions other than avoiding contact with the internal substances, keeping the scrubber tightly sealed and protecting the contents against humidity.




3–16 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

4 - OPERATING THE H2S ANALYZER

Firmware VersionEach 2-Pack analyzer system operates with its own version of firmware. The firmware version for each analyzer is listed in the system calibration report or on the LCD during system start-up. This chapter for system operation assumes the use of version FS 5.13 firmware.

Powering Up the AnalyzerAfter mounting the analyzer, connecting the power wires, connecting the gas lines, connecting the (optional) output signal wires and checking for leaks, you are ready to power up the analyzer.

To power up the analyzer:1. Power up the analyzer by energizing the circuit to the analyzer.

2. For systems with a heated enclosure, confirm that the sample system enclosure is heated to approximately the specified temperature by observing the temperature reading on the by observing the temperature reading on the door mounted thermometer.

The analyzer is designed to be a stationary measuring device. It should be securely mounted during normal operation.

The laser housing labels on the flanges of the sample cell warn about exposure to laser radiation inside. Never open the sample cell unless directed to do so by a service representative and the analyzer power is turned off.

The optical head has a seal and “WARNING” sticker to prevent inadvertent tampering with the device. Do not attempt to compromise the seal of the optical head assembly. Doing so will result in loss of device sensitivity and inaccurate measurement data. Repairs can then only be performed by the factory and are not covered under warranty.

Refer to the figures for the analyzer electronic control boards in Figure 2–2 on page 2–4 or Figure 2–3 on page 2–5 for locating fuses. If you need to replace a fuse, use only the same type and rating of fuse as the original as listed in the analyzer fuse specifications table in Table 2–1 or Table 2–2.



3. The system goes through an initialization period while showing the firmware version on the bottom line until the LCD displays the Normal Mode screen.

4. Enable Peak Tracking following the procedure outlined in “Changing Measurement and Control Parameters” on page 4-9.

5. Three to four minutes are required for the analyzer to establish reference spectra before displaying a reading.

6. After initialization and establishment of reference spectra, the LCD displays four lines, the third of which is blank.

The measurements displayed are:

• H2S: Refers to the analyte concentration in the sample cell (in units) selected in Mode 2.

• P: Pressure in the sample cell in units selected in Mode 2.

7. Continuous updates of the measurement parameters displaying on the LCD indicate that the analyzer is operating normally.

Powering Down the AnalyzerIt may be necessary to power down the analyzer for problem solving or maintenance reasons. An approved switch or circuit breaker rated for 15 amps

For systems with heated enclosures, a Temperature too Low or Temperature too High fault will activate the General Fault Alarm when the enclosure temperature is more than 5 °C above or below the specified temperature. Once the enclosure has reached the specified temperature, reset the General Fault Alarm (see Table 4–1).

Definitions for the acronyms displayed on the LCD are given in the section “Modes Defined” on page 4-4.

<NORMAL MODE>H2S: 1.0256ppmv

P: 954.4mb T: 76.1F

4–2 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

Operating the H2S Analyzer

should have been installed and clearly marked as the disconnecting device for the analyzer.

To power down the analyzer:1. Switch off the power to the analyzer using the switch or circuit

breaker designated as the disconnection device for the equipment.

2. If the analyzer is going to be shut down for a short period of time for routine maintenance, isolate the analyzer from the sample conditioning system (SCS) by following the procedure under “To isolate the measurement sample cell for short-term shutdown” on page 3-7.

3. If the analyzer is going to be shut down for a long period of time, follow the procedure under “To isolate the process sample tap for long-term shutdown” on page 3-8 or contact SpectraSensors’ Technical Support Group. It is recommended to also disconnect the power completely from the analyzer to prevent potential damage from lightning strikes.

Operating the Analyzer from the KeypadThe keypad enables the operator to modify measurement units, adjust operational parameters, and perform diagnostics. During normal operation, the LCD continuously displays the measured component’s concentration, sample cell temperature, and sample cell pressure.

The SpectraSensors keypad is shown in Figure 4–1. To activate any functions on the keypad, press the mode key # followed by a number on the keypad to specify a mode.

When you press the # key, the word MODE displays on the LCD. If the keypad watchdog is enabled, a countdown timer will begin when MODE displays. If the countdown expires and no buttons have been pressed, the analyzer will automatically revert to Mode 1.

The * key functions as the “enter” key. Always press * after entering a value using the keypad (unless the entry was made in error). Pressing the * key stores the displayed parameter value and cycles the LCD to the next parameter.

If you do make an error, press the * key followed by the TEST key, and then the * key to return to the parameter and enter the correct value.

You must press the # key before pressing a number or function key to trigger a response from the keypad.



Modes DefinedUse the keypad to access the following modes by pressing the # key first followed by a number (1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 or 9) to activate a mode. The following section explains each mode and the corresponding information that displays on the LCD.

Whenever you press the # key to enter a mode other than Mode 1, the analyzer suspends measurement until you return to Mode 1.

Every time another mode is accessed regardless of whether a parameter has been changed, the analyzer requires three to four minutes time upon returning to Mode 1 to re-establish reference spectra before displaying a reading.

Figure 4–1 H2S keypad (FS 5.13 Firmware)

#E TEST

1

4

7

_

2

5

8

0

3

6

9

.

*

4-20 mA TEST

LCD DISPLAY

EXPONENT VALUE

SCROLL DIRECTION

SCRUBBER LIFE DATA

EXPORT DIAGNOSTIC DATA

VALIDATION RESULTS

ACTIVATE VALIDATION 2

ACTIVATE VALIDATION 1

CHANGE PARAMETERS

DIAGNOSTIC PARAMETERS

NORMAL DISPLAY

MODE KEY

“ENTER” KEY

4–4 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13


Mode 1: (Normal Mode)Mode 1 continuously displays updated measurements. Press the # key followed by the 1 key.


• H2S: Refers to the concentration in the sample cell (in units) of the analyte/component selected in Mode 2.


• T: Temperature in the sample cell in units selected in Mode 2.

Mode 2: (Set Parameter Mode)Mode 2 enables user to view and change measurement parameters. Follow the procedure under “Changing Measurement and Control Parameters” on page 4-9 for viewing and changing any of the parameters.

Mode 3: (Scrubber Life Data)Displays the predicted remaining scrubber/dryer capacity of the days remaining of service. Press the # key followed by the 3 key.

The New Scrubber Alarm fault will activate the General Alarm Fault when the scrubber/dryer capacity is predicted to be 5% or less, or when the value for days left reaches 0. Refer to “Servicing the H2S Scrubber” on page 3-11 for information.

+# 1

<NORMAL MODE>H2S: 1.0256ppmv

P: 954.4mb T: 76.1F

+# 3

<SCRUBBER LIFE MODE>Scrubber Life Data:Life left: 98.3%Days left: 531



Mode 4: (System Diagnostic Parameters)Mode 4 displays system diagnostic data. These values may be useful when troubleshooting the system. Press the # key followed by the 4 key.

The diagnostic parameters displayed are:

• DryTemp (T D): Shows the temperature in the measurement cell when scrubbed sample gas is flowing through it.

• WetTemp (W): Shows the temperature in the measurement cell when normal sample gas is flowing through it.

• DryPressure (P D): Shows the pressure in the measurement cell when scrubbed sample gas is flowing through it.

• WetPressure (W): Shows the pressure in the measurement cell when normal sample gas is flowing through it.

• DryDC (DC D): Shows the magnitude of the DC laser power in the measurement cell when scrubbed sample gas is flowing through it. Acceptable values are between 800 and 3300. A number below or above this range will trigger a Laser Power too Low or Laser Power too High, respectively (see “Alarms” on page 4-35) indicating that either the optics need to be cleaned or there is an alignment problem.

• WetDC (W): Shows the magnitude of the DC laser power in the measurement cell when normal sample gas is flowing through it. Acceptable values are between 800 and 3300. A number below or above this range will trigger a Laser Power too Low or Laser Power too High, respectively (see “Alarms” on page 4-35) indicating that either the optics need to be cleaned or there is an alignment problem.

• Fit: The measure of “goodness of fit” for the last measurement point.

Whenever you press the # key to enter a mode other than Mode 1, the analyzer suspends measurement until you return to Mode 1.

+# 4

T D: 50.7 W: 50.6 CP D: 954 W: 1103mbDCD: 2674 W: 2672Fit: 0.98 Mid:60.24

4–6 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13


• Mid: The laser current set point after adjustment by the peak-tracking software.

Mode 5: (Analog Output Test Mode)Mode 5 is used to turn on the 4-20 mA current loop output (at the current set with the 4-20 mA Test parameter) for test and calibration purposes. Press the # key followed by the 5 key.

Returning to Mode 1 re-establishes normal 4-20 mA current loop operation.

Mode 6: (Diagnostic Data Download)Mode 6 is used to transfer diagnostic data to the serial port and read the individual data points of both the DC and 2f spectra that the instrument analyzes to calculate the gas concentration. Viewing these data can be helpful in diagnosing problems with the analyzer. Press the # key followed by the 6 key.

The data points, along with intermediate calculation results, are output to the serial port whenever Mode 6 is selected.

+# 5

<TEST 4-20MA MODE>

4-20 mA output is at0.0% or 4.0mA

+# 6

<DUMP SPECTRUM MODE>

Index: 0



Mode 7: (Measure Port1 Mode) • Mode 7 switches the analyzer to measure validation 1 gas supply.

Press the # key followed by the 7 key.


Returning to Mode 1 re-establishes normal operation measuring process gas.

Mode 8: (Measure Port2 Mode)Mode 8 switches the analyzer to measure validation 2 gas supply. Press the # key followed by the 8 key.


Returning to Mode 1 re-establishes normal operation measuring process gas.

+# 7

<MEASURE PORT1 MODE>

Validation 1 PassedH2S: 4.0256ppmv

+# 8

<MEASURE PORT2 MODE>

Validation 2 PassedH2S: 4.0256ppmv

4–8 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13


Mode 9: (Recall Validation Results)Mode 9 recalls the measured value from last autovalidation cycle on units with autovalidation capability. Press the # key followed by the 9 key.

Mode TEST: (Analog Input Test Mode)Mode Test is used to view a real-time reading of the 4-20 mA analog input state, as well as its current raw and scaled values for test and calibration purposes. In this mode, the analyzer functions normally, as in Mode 1, except that the LCD (display) shows the 4-20 mA analog input signal instead of the current concentration, temperature and pressure. Press the # key followed by the TEST key.

Changing Measurement and Control ParametersIn Mode 2, all of the pertinent measurement and control parameters can be viewed and changed. Refer to Table 4–1 for a list of parameters and value range. The parameters are listed in the order viewed during Mode 2 operation.

Table 4–1 Typical values for parameter setpoints

Parameter Setting Function

Process Purge Time 60-9999Default = 60

Sets the purge time before process measurements and after a valida-tion

Logger Rate 1–1000 readingsDefault = 16

Sets the number of measurements included in the running average

+# 9

<VALIDATION RESULTS>Date:05-24-13 23:301pass 0.22ppmv2pass 22.34ppmv

+# TEST

<NORMAL MODE>

4-20mA input is ON4095 or 68948 mb



Table 4-1 Typical values for parameter setpoints (Continued)


Rapid Change Monitor 0, 1Default = 0

Sets the dynamic logger rate based on the concentration of rate change

Temperature Unit 0 or 1Default = 0

Sets the display unit for tempera-ture

Pressure Unit 0, 1, 2, or 3Default = 0

Sets the display unit for pressure

Concentration Unit 0-8Default = 0

Sets the display unit for concentra-tion

Custom Precision 0-5Default = 2

Sets the number of viewable digits to the right of the decimal point

RATA(Relative Accuracy Test Audit)

0 or 1Default = 0

Enables or disables adjustment fac-tors

RATA Multiplier -1.E+06 to 1.E+06Default = 1

Slope adjustment factor

RATA Offset -1.E+06 to 1.E+06Default = 0

Offset adjustment factor

Peak Tracking 0, 1 or 2Default = 0

Sets peak tracking capability to off, on or reset for the system

New Scrub Installed 0 or 1Default =0

Resets scrubber/dryer lifetime monitor

Keypad Watchdog 0-9999 Default = 60

Sets the time in seconds before the MODE screen automatically reverts to Normal Mode

Set Time - Hour 0 - 23Default = 0

Sets the current hour

Set Time - Minute 0 - 59Default = 0

Sets the current minute

Set Time - Day 1 - 31Default = 0

Sets the present day

Set Time - Month 1 - 12Default = 1

Sets the present month

Set Time - Year 2006-2144Default = 2012

Sets the present year

General Alarm DO 0, 1, 2Default = 0

Sets the general fault alarm to be latching, non-latching or reset

DO Alarm Setup 0-2147483647Default = 8192

Sets the functionality of the Assign-able Alarm digital output

4–10 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13




Low Alarm Setpoint -1.0E-06 to 1.0E+06Default = 0

Sets the concentration low alarm thresh-old in ppmv or moisture dew point

High Alarm Setpoint -1.0E-06 to 1.0E+06Default = 0

Sets the concentration high alarm threshold in ppmv or moisture dew point

AO 4-20 mA Test 0 - 100.0Default = 0

Sets the 4-20 mA output to a per-centage of full scale

4-20 mA Alarm Action 0, 1, 2 or 3Default = 0

Sets the current loop state upon alarm condition

AO 4 mA Value -1.0E-06 to 1.0E+06Default = 0

Sets ppmv or moisture dew point value corresponding to 4 mA current loop out-put

AO 20 mA Value -1.0E-06 to 1.0E+06Default = Full scale

Sets ppmv or moisture dew point value corresponding to 20 mA current loop output

Calculate Dew Point 0, 1 or 2Default = 0

Enables the dew point calculation and controls it's output

Dew Point Method 0, 1, 2 or 3Default = 0

Type of dew point calculation

Pipeline Pressure 0-500000Default = 1000

Pressure used for dew point calcu-lation

AI Pressure Input 0 or 1Default = 0

Controls analog input of pipeline pressure

AI 4 mA Value 0-500000Default = 0

Analog input 4 mA value

AI 20 mA Value 0-500000Default = 100000

Analog input 20 mA value

Modbus Address User Set, 0-250Default = 1

Sets the address for the analyzer

Modbus Mode 0, 1, or 2Default = 0

Sets type of Modbus protocol

2 Way Com Port 0, 1, 2, 3Default = 11

Sets the port that allows two-way communications

Baud Rate 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4Default = 3

Sets the baud rate for the customer port

Val Purge Period 60 - 4000Default = 60

Sets the amount of time (in sec-onds) for validation gas to purge the system

Val Duration 0 - 8000Default = 240

Sets the duration (in seconds) of the validation routine





Val Attempts 1 - 8000Default = 2

Sets the number of validations to be attempted before signaling fail-ure

Val 1 Concentration 0-Full ScaleDefault = 4

Sets concentration of validation gas supply #1

Val 2 Concentration 0-Full ScaleDefault = 4

Sets concentration of validation gas supply #2

Validation Allowance 1-100Default = 100

Sets acceptable deviation (in %) for validation

Zero Val Tolerance 1-2000Default = 1

Sets maximum acceptable zero measurement reading during vali-dation routine

Daily Validation 0 or 1Default = 0

Turns daily autovalidation on or off

Val Interval 1 - 400Default = 1

Interval (in days) between valida-tion cycles

Val Start Time 0 - 23Default = 8

Sets the hour of the day for valida-tion

Start Validation 0 or 1Default = 0

Initiates validation cycle

4-20 mA Val Action 0 or 1Default = 0

Sets the current loop mode during validation

Val Perm Constant Kp 0-1000000 Default = 0

Sets the system constant for the perme-ation tube devices

Val Perm Rate Rp 0-1000000Default = 0

Sets the calibrated permeation rate for the permeation tube

Cancel Val Alarms 0 or1Default = 0

Resets the validation alarms and relays

Val Auto DumpSpectrm

0 or 1Default =0

Sets the analyzer to dump spec-trum information during a valida-tion measurement

4–12 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13


To change parameters in Mode 21. Press the # key followed by the 2 key.

The LCD prompts for a numeric password.

2. Enter the user password (3142) on the keypad, then press the * key to enter the number.

3. Starting with the first parameter that displays, enter a new value and/or press the * key to store the value and cycle to the next parameter.

4. When finished changing or viewing the measurement and control parameters, press the # key followed by the 1 key to return to Mode 1 and normal operation.

Measurement and Control Parameters DefinedThe definitions for the measurement and control parameters are shown below in alphabetical order for easy reference. Refer to Table 4–1 to review order listed during Mode 2 configuration.

2 Way Com Port The 2 Way Com Port parameter sets the port that allows two-way communications, including Modbus and the diagnostic protocol. Enter 0 to turn

The scroll direction can be reversed by pressing the TEST key followed by the * key.

+# 2

<SET PARAMETER MODE>Enter password:

FS 5.13-XXXX

<SET PARAMETER MODE>Process Purge Time60Enter a value (secs)



off two-way communications, 1 for the customer port, 2 for the service port, or 3 for the Ethernet port (if applicable).

The customer port baud rate is set from the Baud Rate parameter with 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, and no parity. The service port baud rate is 115200 with 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, and no parity. If the Ethernet port is available, refer to “Configuring the Ethernet Port” on page 6-1 for setup information.

4-20 mA Alarm ActionThe 4-20 mA Alarm Option determines the current loop state upon an alarm condition. Enter 0 for no action, 1 for the current loop to assume a low state upon an alarm condition, 2 for the current loop to assume a high state upon an alarm condition, or 3 for the current loop to track and hold the current state upon an alarm condition.

4-20 mA Val ActionThe 4-20 mA Val Action parameter sets the operation mode of the 4-20 mA current loop during validation cycles. Enter 0 for the current loop to track and hold the last process measurement or 1 for the current loop to continue to output the analyzer measurements during the validation cycle.

<SET PARAMETER MODE>2 Way Com Port10:Off1:Cus2:Ser3:Eth

<SET PARAMETER MODE>4-20mA Alarm Action00:None 1:L 2:H 3:T&H

<SET PARAMETER MODE>4-20 mA Val Action00:Hold 1:Measure

4–14 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13


AI 4 mA ValueThe AI 4 mA Value parameter sets the pipeline pressure (in mbar) corresponding to a 4 mA current loop input.

AI 20 mA ValueThe AI 20 mA Value parameter sets the pipeline pressure (in mbar) corresponding to a 20 mA current loop input.

AI Pressure InputThe AI Pressure Input parameter enables or disables usage of a live pipeline pressure via the analog input for the calculation and display of dew point temperature. There are two choices: 0 to turn the analog pressure input off, and 1 to turn it on. If this parameter is disabled, then a fixed pipeline pressure must be entered through the Pipeline Pressure parameter.

AO 4 mA ValueThe AO 4 mA Value parameter sets the concentration (in ppmv) or dew point temperature (in degrees Celsius or Fahrenheit), depending on whether dew

<SET PARAMETER MODE>AI 4 mA Value0.00000Enter a value (mb)

<SET PARAMETER MODE>AI 20 mA Value100000.00000Enter a value (mb)

<SET PARAMETER MODE>AI Pressure Input00:Disable 1:Enable



point temperature calculation and display are enabled (i.e., the Calculate Dew Point parameter set equal to 1), corresponding to a 4 mA current loop output.

AO 20 mA ValueThe AO 20 mA Value parameter sets the concentration (in ppmv) or dew point temperature (in degrees Celsius or Fahrenheit), depending on whether dew point temperature calculation and display are enabled (i.e., the Calculate Dew Point parameter set equal to 1), corresponding to a 20 mA current loop output.

AO 4-20 mA TestThe AO 20 mA Test parameter sets the output of the current loop when in Mode 5 for testing and calibration purposes. The value entered represents a percent of scale value where zero equals 4 mA and full scale equals 20 mA. Thus, the current loop output, i, is given by

,

where R is the AO 4-20 mA Test parameter value.

Baud RateThe Baud Rate parameter sets the baud rate for the customer RS-232 port. Enter 0 for 19200, 1 for 38400, 2 for 57600, or 3 for 115200, or 4 for 9600

<SET PARAMETER MODE>AO 4 mA Value0.00000ppmv or DewPoint F/C

<SET PARAMETER MODE>AO 20 mA Value20.00000ppmv or DewPoint F/C

i R 20mA 4mA–( ) 4mA+=

<SET PARAMETER MODE>AO 4-20 mA Test0.00000Enter a value (%)

4–16 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13


baud rate. The other settings for this port are 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, no parity and no hardware flow control.

Calculate Dew PointThe Calculate Dew Point parameter enables or disables the calculation and display of dew point temperature. There are three choices: 0 to turn the calculation and display of dew point temperature off, 1 to allow the dew point to be output on the LCD and on the analog output (setup of the AO 4 mA and 20 mA values is required), and 2 to allow the dew point to be output on the LCD only.

Cancel Val Alarms The Cancel Val Alarms parameter cancels the validation alarm and resets all validation flags once activated. Entering 1 cancels the alarm. Once the action is complete the parameter automatically reverts to 0.

Concentration UnitThe Concentration Unit parameter designates the options for measured concentration, which include:

• 0 for ppmv

• 1 for lb/MMscf [MMscf =million standard cubic feet (15.6 °C, 101.325 kPa)]

Make sure that the COM port used is set for the same baud rate as the analyzer.

<SET PARAMETER MODE>Baud Rate30:19 1:38 2:57 3:115

<SET PARAMETER MODE>Calculate Dew Point00:Off 1:lcd&AO 2:lcd

<SET PARAMETER MODE>Cancel Val Alarms01:Cancel



• 2 for %

• 3 for mg/Nm3 [Nm3 = normal cubic meters (15.6 °C, 101.325 kPa)]

• 4 for ppmw

• 5 for ppbv

• 6 for ppbw

• 7 for grains/100scf

• 8 for custom display units and conversion factor (user EU Tag Part 1 and 2 as defined by Modbus registers 45203 and 45205)

If the display units are correct but the conversion factor is not correct for the application, a custom conversion factor can be defined using Modbus. To set a custom conversion factor, first choose the correct display units (based on the Concentration Unit parameter) and then define the conversion factor for the associated display units using Modbus. If the Modbus register is set to 0 then the default conversion factor is used. However, if it is set to a value greater than 0 then that value is used as the conversion factor.

If a correct concentration unit option for the display units does not exist, then a custom display unit and conversion can be created using Modbus. To set a custom display unit, select option 8 for the Concentration Unit parameter. Next define the ASCII display text and associated conversion factor using Modbus.

Custom PrecisionThe Custom Precision parameter sets the number of viewable digits to the right of the decimal point. The total number of digits the analyzer can display at any one time is six. Therefore, when the size of the value plus the Custom Precision exceeds six, the number of digits to the right of the decimal point will be reduced accordingly.

<SET PARAMETER MODE>Concentration Unit00:ppm 1:lbs 2:% 3:mg

<SET PARAMETER MODE>Custom Precision 2Enter a value

4–18 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13


Daily ValidationThe Daily Validation parameter enables or disables the time of day autovalidation feature. When enabled, an autovalidation cycle is initiated every ‘X’ day (where ‘X’ is defined by Val Interval) at the time of day established by Val Start Time. Enter 0 to turn the feature off or 1 to turn the feature on.

Dew Point MethodThe Dew Point Method parameter sets the type of industry standard dew point calculation to be performed when Calculate Dew Point is enabled. Enter 0 for ISO 18453:2006, 1 for the ASTM 1142-95 Eq. (1), 2 for the ASTM 1142-95 Eq. (2), or 3 for the Arden Buck method. Refer to Appendix C for further information on the dew point calculation methods.

DO Alarm Setup The DO Alarm Setup parameter sets the functionality of the Assignable Alarm. Add together the hexadecimal values according to Table 4–2 for each fault chosen to trigger the Assignable Alarm. Convert the resulting hexadecimal value to a decimal value and enter the number for normally deactivated relay functionality. Add ‘1’ to the resulting decimal value to switch to normally activated functionality.

For example, the hexadecimal value of 0002000 converts to decimal value of 8192, which when entered results in a normally deactivated relay triggered by the Concentra High Alarm. Entering a value of 8193 would result normally activated relay (fail safe) triggered by the Concentra High Alarm. To enable the relay to be triggered by the New Scrubber Alarm as well, the two

<SET PARAMETER MODE>Daily Validation00:Disable 1:Enable

<SET PARAMETER MODE>Dew Point Method00:ISO1:AS12:AS23:AB

<SET PARAMETER MODE>DO Alarm Setup8192Enter decimal value



hexadecimal values 0002000 and 8000000 are added for a result of 8002000, which converts to a decimal value of 134225920.

Table 4–2 Assignable Alarm functionality

Bit Decimal Hex Value Alarm Functionality

0 1 00000001 Power Fail (Always Activated)

1 2 00000002 Any alarm active

2 4 00000004 Laser Power Low Alrm

3 8 00000008 Laser Powr High Alrm

4 16 00000010 Laser Zero Low Alarm

5 32 00000020 Laser Zero High Alrm

6 64 00000040 Laser Curnt Low Alrm

7 128 00000080 Laser Curnt High Alrm

8 256 00000100 Pressure Low Alarm

9 512 00000200 Pressure High Alarm

10 24 00000400 Temp Low Alarm

11 2048 00000800 Temp High Alarm

12 4096 00001000 Concentra Low Alarm

13 8192 00002000 Concentra High Alarm

14 16384 00004000 PeakTk Restart Alarm

15 32768 00008000 Fitting Restart Alrm

16 65536 00010000 Not Used

17 131072 00020000 Not Used

18 262144 00040000 Not Used

19 524288 00080000 Flow Switch Alarm

20 1048576 00100000 Val 1 Fail Alarm

21 2097152 00200000 Val 2 Fail Alarm

22 4194304 00400000 Not Used

23 8388608 00800000 Not Used

24 16777216 01000000 DeltaDC Restart Alrm

25 33554432 02000000 DeltaT Restart Alarm

4–20 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13


General Alarm DOThe General Alarm DO sets the operation of the general alarm relay digital output when a general fault alarm occurs. The relay is normally energized making it fail-safe for detection of not only alarms, but also power failures. Enter 0 to make the relay latching, which means any general fault alarm will de-energize the relay and keep it de-energized even if the alarm condition clears. It takes a reset of the relay using this parameter to return the relay to ‘normal’ state. Enter a 1 to make the relay non-latching, which means any general fault alarm will de-energize the relay; however, when the alarm condition clears, the relay will automatically reset to its normal state. Enter a 2 to reset the relay and any active alarms to the ‘normal’ state. After the relay resets, this parameter will automatically revert to the setting from before the reset was initiated.

High Alarm SetpointThe High Alarm Setpoint parameter determines the concentration threshold above which the Concentra High Alarm fault will be triggered (see “Alarms” on page 4-35). The value entered is compared to the moving average over the number of measurement points set by the Logger Rate. To be turned off, the

Table 4-2 Assignable Alarm functionality (Continued)

Bit Decimal Hex Value Alarm Functionality

26 67108864 04000000 Pressr Restart Alarm

27 134217728 08000000 New Scrubber Alarm

28 268435456 10000000 R2 Restart Alarm

29 536870912 20000000 R3 Restart Alarm

30 1073741824 40000000 FracShft Restrt Alrm

31 2147483648 80000000 Low Purge Rate Alarm

<SET PARAMETER MODE>General Alarm DO00:L 1:NonL 2:Reset



setpoint must have a value greater than the maximum range of the analyzer or maximum dew point.

Keypad WatchdogThe Keypad Watchdog parameter sets the allowable time (in seconds) that the analyzer can be on the MODE screen and the Mode 2 (Set Parameter Mode) password screen before automatically reverting to Mode 1 (Normal Mode). Setting this parameter to a value less than five (5) will disable this feature. If it is set for greater than or equal to five (5), then the value represents the number of seconds before the analyzer reverts to Normal Mode.

Logger RateThe Logger Rate parameter sets the number of measurements included in the running average. The display and the current loop output will each have a value representing the running average of the concentration over a number of measurements equal to Logger Rate.

Low Alarm SetpointThe Low Alarm Setpoint parameter determines the concentration threshold below which the Concentra Low Alarm fault will be triggered (see “Alarms” on page 4-35). The value entered is compared to the moving average over the number of measurement points set by the Logger Rate. To be turned off, the

<SET PARAMETER MODE>High Alarm Setpoint0.00000ppmv or DewPoint F/C

<SET PARAMETER MODE>Keypad Watchdog60<5:Off >=5:Secs

<SET PARAMETER MODE>Logger Rate16Enter a value

4–22 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13


setpoint must have a value less than the minimum range of the analyzer or minimum dew point.

Modbus AddressThe Modbus Address parameter sets the analyzer address when the analyzer is used as a Modbus slave device. Addresses from 1 to 250 can be used.

Modbus ModeThe Modbus Mode parameter sets the communications protocol for the port selected by the 2 Way Com Port parameter. There are three choices: 0 for turning the Modbus capabilities off and defaulting to generic serial output as described in “Receiving Serial Data (Customer Port Output)” on page 5-1 (the ports not designated for 2 way communications will also output the generic serial output); 1 for enabling the analyzer to respond to Gould Modbus RTU function codes 3, 6 and 16; and 2 for enabling the analyzer to respond to Daniel Modbus RTU function codes 3, 6 and 16.

New Scrub InstalledThe New Scrub Installed parameter resets the scrubber/dryer alarm once activated, and the scrubber/dryer lifetime monitor. The New Scrubber Alarm fault will activate the General Fault Alarm when the scrubber/dryer capacity is predicted to be 5% or less (refer to “Servicing the H2S Scrubber” on page

<SET PARAMETER MODE>Low Alarm Setpoint0.00000ppmv or DewPoint F/C

<SET PARAMETER MODE>Modbus Address1Enter node (1-250)

<SET PARAMETER MODE>Modbus Mode00:Off 1:GMR 2:DMR



3-11 for more information). Once the scrubber/dryer is replaced, enter 1 to reset the scrubber/dryer alarm and lifetime monitor.

Peak TrackingThe Peak Tracking parameter enables a software utility that periodically adjusts the laser current to keep the absorption peak of the measured component at a known location. There are three choices: 0 for no peak tracking, 1 for peak tracking (default) and 2 for resetting the peak to its factory default setting. Selecting 2 will return the current analyzer midpoint to the factory default midpoint, and then automatically revert the parameter value to its setting before the reset was initiated. In most cases, the peak tracking should be set to 1 for on.

Pipeline PressureThe Pipeline Pressure parameter sets the pipeline pressure (in mbar) in the current dew point calculation or, if enabled, displays the current pipeline pressure input through the AI Pressure Input.

<SET PARAMETER MODE>New Scrub Installed01:Yes

<SET PARAMETER MODE>Peak Tracking10:Off 1:On 2:Rst

<SET PARAMETER MODE>Pipeline Pressure10000.00000Enter a value (mb)

4–24 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13


Pressure UnitThe Pressure Unit parameter designates the display units for the measured absolute pressure in the cell. There are four choices: 0 for millibar, 1 for Torr, 2 for kPa, and 3 for PSIA.

Process Purge TimeThe Process Purge Time sets the time in seconds that the analyzer will purge the system with process gas before starting a dry cycle when switching to the process stream after a validation.

Rapid Change MonitorThe Rapid Change Monitor parameter enables or disables the dynamic logger rate based on the concentration rate of change. Enter 0 to turn the feature off or 1 to turn the feature on.

RATA (Relative Accuracy Test Audit)The RATA parameter enables or disables user definable values that allow adjustment (without affecting the factory calibration) of the analyzer reading

<SET PARAMETER MODE>Pressure Unit00:mb1:Torr2:kPa3:psi


<SET PARAMETER MODE>Rapid Change Monitor 00:Disable 1:Enable



in the field [see “Adjusting Analyzer Reading to Match Specific Standard(s)” on page 4-32].

RATA MultiplierThe RATA Multiplier parameter is a user definable value that enables adjustment (without affecting the factory calibration) of the analyzer response (or slope) in the field [see “Adjusting Analyzer Reading to Match Specific Standard(s)” on page 4-32].

RATA OffsetThe RATA Offset parameter is a user definable value that enables adjustment (without affecting the factory calibration) of the analyzer offset in the field [see “Adjusting Analyzer Reading to Match Specific Standard(s)” on page 4-32].

Set Time - DayThe Set Time - Day parameter sets the current day for the clock driving daily validations.

<SET PARAMETER MODE>RATA00:Disable 1:Enable

<SET PARAMETER MODE>RATA Multiplier1.00000Enter a value

<SET PARAMETER MODE>RATA Offset0.00000Enter a value

<SET PARAMETER MODE>Set Time - Day24Enter a value (DD)

4–26 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13


Set Time - HourThe Set Time - Hour parameter sets the current hour for the clock driving daily validations.

Set Time - MinuteThe Set Time - Minute parameter sets the current minute for the clock driving daily validations.

Set Time - MonthThe Set Time - Month parameter sets the current month for the clock driving daily validations.

Set Time - YearThe Set Time - Year parameter sets the current year for the clock driving daily validations.

<SET PARAMETER MODE>Set Time - Hour7Enter a value (0-23)

<SET PARAMETER MODE>Set Time - Minute5Enter a value (0-59)

<SET PARAMETER MODE>Set Time - Month5Enter a value (MM)

<SET PARAMETER MODE>Set Time - Year2013Enter a value (YYYY)



Start ValidationThe Start Validation parameter initiates the validation cycle. After the cycle begins, this parameter automatically reverts to 0.

Temperature UnitThe Temperature Unit parameter designates the display units for the measured cell temperature. There are two choices: 0 for degrees Celsius and 1 for Fahrenheit. The default value is the standard unit of measurement in the region the analyzer is being used.

Val 1 ConcentrationThe Val 1 Concentration parameter sets the concentration value of validation gas supply #1. The analyzer can be configured for a zero gas by setting this parameter to 0.0 and then setting the Zero Val Tolerance to the maximum acceptable reading. Otherwise, set this parameter to the concentration value of the validation gas supply and set Validation Allowance to the allowable variation range (±%).

When procuring a gas standard, make sure the background gas is that specified or a mix that closely resembles the contents of the process stream and have the gas standard certified to better than the specified precision of the analyzer, if possible.

<SET PARAMETER MODE>Start Validation01:Start

<SET PARAMETER MODE>Temperature Unit00:C 1:F

<SET PARAMETER MODE>Val 1 Concentration4.000000:ZeroGas >0:ppmvVal

4–28 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13


Val 2 ConcentrationThe Val 2 Concentration parameter sets the concentration value of validation gas supply #2. The analyzer can be configured for a zero gas by setting this parameter to 0.0 and then setting the Zero Val Tolerance to the maximum acceptable reading. Otherwise, set this parameter to the concentration value of the validation gas supply and set Validation Allowance to the allowable variation range (±%).

Val AttemptsThe Val Attempts parameter sets the maximum number of failures of the analyzer to measure the validation gas within the set tolerances (see Zero Val Tolerance and Validation Allowance) before stopping the autovalidation sequence and triggering a Validation Fail Alarm.

Val Auto DumpSpectrmThe Val Auto DumpSpectrm parameter determines whether a Mode 6 dump automatically occurs after each validation measurement. There are two choices: 0 to turn the automatic data dump during validation off, and 1 to turn it on.


<SET PARAMETER MODE>Val 2 Concentration4.000000:ZeroGas >0:ppmvVal

<SET PARAMETER MODE>Val Attempts2Enter a value

<SET PARAMETER MODE>Val Auto DumpSpectrm00:Disable 1:Enable



Val DurationThe Val Duration parameter sets the total number of seconds a validation cycle will run. Actual validation measurement time is equal to Val Duration minus Val Purge Period minus the time required to get the first measurement value. Thus, Val Duration must be set to a value greater than the sum of these components.

Validation AllowanceThe Validation Allowance parameter sets the tolerance (±%) for validation measurements when Val 1 Concentration or Val 2 Concentration is set to a value greater than 0.

Val Interval The Val Interval parameter sets the number of days between autovalidation cycles. The next scheduled validation cycle would occur in Val Interval days at the Val Start Time.

Val Perm Constant KpFor systems with a permeation device, the Val Perm Constant Kp parameter defines the system constant (Kp) for the permeation device, which is determined at the factory at the time of calibration. The permeation device can be replaced with another permeation device with a different permeation rate, and the correct new permeation concentration will be calculated by the analyzer software using the system constant. The Kp will be constant over the

<SET PARAMETER MODE>Val Duration240Enter a value (secs)

<SET PARAMETER MODE>Validation Allowance100.00000% of Val Concentratn

<SET PARAMETER MODE>Val Interval 1Enter a value (days)

4–30 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13


life of the analyzer provided the temperature, sample flow rate and pressure of the system are not changed from the factory settings.

Val Perm Rate RpFor systems with a permeation device, the Val Perm Rate Rp parameter is defines the permeation rate in ng/min, referenced on the permeation device certification. When the validation concentration begins to drop steadily, the permeation device must be replaced. When replacing the device, the Val Perm Rate Rp must also be updated.

Val Purge PeriodThe Val Purge Period parameter sets the number of seconds the analyzer will purge the system with validation gas before starting a dry cycle upon validation initiation. Because validation gas may be introduced into the system at various distances from the analyzer, adjustment of the Val Purge Period parameter is necessary to optimize the time the validation gas is allowed to purge through the transport tubing before the analyzer makes a validation measurement. Optimization of the Val Purge Period parameter ensures an accurate measurement of the validation gas while minimizing gas consumption.

<SET PARAMETER MODE>Val Perm Constant Kp0.240:Off >0:System Cons

<SET PARAMETER MODE>Val Perm Rate Rp0.330:Off >0:ng/min

<SET PARAMETER MODE>Val Purge Period60Enter a value (secs)



Val Start Time The Val Start Time parameter sets the hour of the day for the daily autovalidation to begin.

Zero Val ToleranceThe Zero Val Tolerance parameter is used to set the maximum acceptable reading when validating with zero gas. To configure the analyzer for zero gas set the parameter Val 1 Concentration or Val 2 Concentration to 0.0.

Adjusting Analyzer Reading to Match Specific Standard(s)In some instances, the user may wish to adjust the analyzer reading to match the concentration (or concentrations) of a specific standard (or standards). The RATA Multiplier and RATA Offset parameters are used to adjust the analyzer output in the field without affecting the factory calibration. Both parameters are used when samples from two different concentration standards are available, whereas only the RATA Offset parameter is used when a sample from only one concentration standard is available.

The value of the RATA Multiplier parameter, S, is determined by

,

where C1 is the certified concentration of standard No. 1, C2 is the certified concentration of standard No. 2, A1 is the measured concentration (analyzer reading) of standard No. 1, and A2 is the measured concentration (analyzer reading) of standard No. 2.

The RATA Offset parameter, O, is determined by

,

where when a sample from only one concentration standard is available.

<SET PARAMETER MODE>Val Start Time 8Hour of day (0-23)

<SET PARAMETER MODE>Zero Val Tolerance1.00000Enter a value (ppmv)

SC2 C1–A2 A1–--------------------=

O C1 S A1⋅( )–=

S 1=

4–32 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13


To adjust the analyzer reading:1. Validate the analyzer using one or two concentration standards (see

“Validating the Analyzer” on page 4-40).

2. Calculate the RATA Multiplier and/or RATA Offset parameter(s) using the equations above.

3. Enter Mode 2 by pressing the # key followed by the 2 key. The LCD prompts for a numeric password. Enter the user password (3142) on the keypad, then press the * key to enter the number.

4. Follow the procedure under “Changing Measurement and Control Parameters” on page 4-9 to enter the new values.

Confirm the new values by re-measuring the bottle(s) of test gas.

Scaling and Calibrating the Current Loop SignalThe 4-20 mA current loop signals are most conveniently scaled and calibrated at the receiving end (RTU, flow computer, etc.).

To scale the receiver’s output, the analyzer’s current loop output is forced to 4 mA (0%) and 20 mA (100%) using the 4-20 mA Test parameter. The receiver is adjusted to read “0” and “Full Scale,” respectively.

SpectraSensors recommends validating the analyzer using only the analyte mixed in the validation gas specified on the analyzer calibration report. A bottle of test gas with certified concentrations of approximately 20% and 80% of full scale are recommended for two point validation. For single point validation, a bottle with a certified concentration of approximately 50% of full scale should be used.


The 4-20 mA current loop is factory set as the source unless otherwise specified. Contact your sales representative if a change is required.

Be sure to work in a non-hazardous area while handling any electrical connector.



To scale the current loop signal:1. Make sure the current loop is connected and the receiver is set for

the analyzer to source the current.

2. Set the AO 4-20 mA Test parameter to 0% (see Table 4–1).

3. Enter Mode 5 by pressing the # key followed by the 5 key to force the loop current to 4 mA.

4. Adjust the receiver calibration control to read the appropriate value. A current loop output of 4 mA always represents the value set in AO 4 mA Value.

5. Set the 4-20 mA Test parameter to 100%.

6. Enter Mode 5 by pressing the # key followed by the 5 key to force the loop current to 20 mA.

7. Adjust the receiver calibration controls for the appropriate value. A current loop output of 20 mA always represents the value set in AO 20 mA Value.

8. If needed, repeat steps 2-7 to obtain an accurate calibration over the range.

9. After obtaining an accurate calibration of the current loop receiver, press the # key followed by the 1 key to return to Normal Mode.

WarningsWarning messages appear on the front panel LCD and are transmitted via RS-232. Changes in flow conditions such as composition, temperature or pressure since the last scrubber/dryer cycle may produce a warning. Warnings typically trigger a system re-start beginning with a fresh scrubber/dryer cycle. Warnings may include one or more of the following:

• Dry P out of range: This warning occurs when the pressure in the sample cell during a dry cycle is out of range indicating that the scrubber/dryer may be clogged.

• Delta T out of range: This warning occurs when the difference between the measured cell temperature during a wet cycle and the previous dry cycle is out of range.

• Delta P out of range: This warning occurs when the difference between the measured cell pressure during a wet cycle and previous dry cycle is out of range.

Each time another mode is accessed for differential systems, regardless of whether or not a parameter has been changed, the analyzer requires three to four minutes time upon returning to Mode 1 to re-establish reference spectra before displaying a reading.

4–34 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13


• DCdelta out of range: This warning occurs when the difference between the measured cell DC power during a wet cycle and previous dry cycle is out of range.

• Fitting out of range: This warning occurs when the system is unable to adequately fit a curve to the measured signal typically as a result of too much noise in the signal or an unexpected gas mixture in the measurement cell.

• R2 out of range: This warning occurs when reference 2 is out of range, typically as a result of too much of the gas component found in the measurement cell.

• R3 out of range: This warning occurs when reference 3 is out of range, typically as a result of too much of the gas component found in the measurement cell.

• FracShift out of range: This warning occurs when the system is unable to adequately fit the background curve to the measured signal, typically as a result of an unexpected gas mixture in the measurement cell.

• Unable to do validation: This warning occurs if using a permeation validation system with the Daily Validation feature and the current analyzer concentration is beyond an allowable threshold. It is designed to protect the dryer from high concentrations, which can shorten its life cycle. This does not apply to validations that are initiated by the digital input, Mode 7, Mode 8 or Mode 2 Start Validation parameter.

• Wet Peak Tracking/Dry Peak Tracking: This warning indicates when a peak tracking correction has occurred.

AlarmsThe analyzer is equipped with three dry contact relays that indicate a system fault or alarm state. In addition, alarm and fault messages appear on the front panel LCD and are transmitted via RS-232.

System FaultsThe General Fault Alarm is triggered by system faults that cause the General Fault Alarm relay to be activated and the current loop to respond according to the 4-20mA Alarm Option setting. Once activated, the General Fault Alarm can be reset via the General Alarm DO parameter (see “Changing Measurement and Control Parameters” on page 4-9).

System faults include one or more of the following:

• DeltaDC Restart Alrm: This fault occurs when the number of consecutive system restarts caused by a difference between the measured DC signal during a wet cycle and the previous dry cycle exceeds a pre-set limit.



• DeltaT Restart Alarm: This fault occurs when the number of consecutive system restarts caused by a difference between the measured cell temperature during a wet cycle and the previous dry cycle exceeds a pre-set limit.

• Fitting Restart Alarm: This fault occurs when the number of consecutive system restarts caused by the system’s inability to adequately fit a curve to the measured signal exceeds a pre-set limit.

• Flow Switch Alarm: This fault occurs on systems with a digital input flow switch enabled and the digital input triggers the alarm state.

• FracShift Restart Alarm: This fault occurs when the number of consecutive system restarts caused when the system is unable to adequately fit the background curve to the measured signal, typically as a result of an unexpected gas mixture in the measurement cell.

• Laser Curnt Low Alrm: This fault occurs when the laser current goes below the minimum allowable indicating a potential problem with the laser.

• Lasr Curnt High Alrm: This fault occurs when the laser current goes above the maximum allowable indicating a potential problem with the laser.

• Laser Power High Alrm: This fault occurs when the DC signal is saturated typically as a result of the absence of absorbing gas in the sample cell.

• Laser Power Low Alrm: This fault occurs when the DC signal becomes too weak for a reliable measurement typically as a result of mirror contamination.

• Laser Zero High Alarm: This fault occurs if the detector signal value is above the set normal range when the laser is turned off.

• Laser Zero Low Alarm: This fault occurs if the detector signal value is below the set normal range when the laser is turned off.

• Low Purge Rate Alrm: This fault occurs when the scrubber/dryer is unable to remove the analyte being measured at a quick enough rate, typically due to scrubber/dryer saturation.

• New Scrubber Alarm: This fault occurs when the internal scrubber/dryer monitor signals that a new scrubber/dryer is necessary.

• PeakTk Restart Alarm: This fault occurs when the number of consecutive system restarts caused by a peak tracking correction exceeds a pre-set limit.

• Pressure High Alarm: This fault occurs when the pressure in the sample cell exceeds the specified maximum operating pressure.

• Pressure Low Alarm: This fault occurs when the pressure in the sample cell is below the specified minimum operating pressure.

4–36 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13


• Pressure Restart Alarm: This fault occurs when the number of consecutive system restarts caused by a difference between the measured cell pressure during a wet cycle and the previous dry cycle exceeds a pre-set limit.

• R2 Restart Alarm: This fault occurs when the number of consecutive system restarts caused when reference 2 is out of range, typically as a result of too much of the gas component found in the measurement cell.

• R3 Restart Alarm: This fault occurs when the number of consecutive system restarts caused when reference 3 is out of range, typically as a result of too much of the gas component found in the measurement cell.

• Temp High Alarm: This fault occurs when the temperature in the measurement cell exceeds the specified maximum operating temperature.

• Temp Low Alarm: This fault occurs when the temperature in the measurement cell is below the specified minimum operating temperature.

User AlarmsUser alarms are generated based on measurement readings and there relation to Mode 2 parameter settings. They include the following:

• Concentra High Alarm: This fault occurs when the measured concentration is above the limit set with the High Alarm Setpoint parameter (see “High Alarm Setpoint” on page 4-21).

• Concentra Low Alarm: This fault occurs when the measured concentration is below the set limit with the Low Alarm Setpoint (see “Low Alarm Setpoint” on page 4-22).

• Validation 1 Failed/Validation 2 Failed Alarm: An additional alarm for systems equipped with autovalidation that is triggered when the measured concentration of the validation 1 or 2 gas does not agree with the bottle certification to within the allowable limits. These alarms also trigger the Validation Fail dry contact relay. Refer to “Validation Allowance” on page 4-30. Once activated, the Validation Fail Alarm must be manually reset via the Cancel Val Alarms parameter (see “Cancel Val Alarms” on page 4-17).

For systems with heated enclosures, a Temperature too Low or Temperature too High fault will activate the General Fault Alarm when the enclosure temperature is more than 5 °C above or below the specified temperature (refer to the System Specifications for this analyzer). Once the enclosure has reached the specified temperature, reset the General Fault Alarm (see “Changing Measurement and Control Parameters” on page 4-9).



See “Troubleshooting the Analyzer” on page B-1 for recommendations and solutions to common problems resulting in a system fault.

Historical Alarm FlagA Historical Alarm Flag code will also appear on the LCD, as shown in Figure 4–2, and remain until the alarm is reset.

Table 4–3 lists the potential alarm codes and corresponding fault conditions. In the event of multiple alarms, the hexadecimal code from each alarm is added together to yield the Historical Alarm Flag code. For example, a Historical Alarm Flag code of 00C04 indicates that three alarms have occurred: 00004 Laser Power Low Alrm, 00400 Temp Low Alarm, and 00800 Temp High Alarm, where C represents 12 in hexadecimal notation.

Table 4–3 LCD display alarm codes

Hex Value Fault Condition

00000001 General fault condition exists or happened in the past

00000002 General fault condition exists (any alarm is active)

00000004 Laser Power Low Alrm

00000008 Laser Powr High Alrm

00000010 Laser Zero Low Alarm

00000020 Laser Zero High Alrm

00000040 Laser Curnt Low Alrm

00000080 Lasr Curnt High Alrm

<NORMAL MODE 0000004>H2S: 1.0256ppmv

P: 954.4mb T: 76.1F

Figure 4–2 LCD display with alarm code visible indicating Pressure Low Alarm fault

ALARM CODE

4–38 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13


Assignable AlarmThe functionality of the Assignable Alarm is determined by the DO Alarm Setup parameter set in Mode 2 according to Table 4–2. For example, the Assignable Alarm can be configured as a Concentra High Alarm or Concentra Low Alarm that is triggered when the measured concentration is above or below, respectively, the level set in Mode 2. A high concentration causes the Assignable Alarm relays to be activated and the message “Concentration High” to appear on the LCD.

Table 4-3 LCD display alarm codes (Continued)

Hex Value Fault Condition

00000100 Pressure Low Alarm

00000200 Pressure High Alarm

00000400 Temp Low Alarm

00000800 Temp High Alarm

00001000 Concentra Low Alarm

00002000 Concentra High Alarm

00004000 PeakTk Restart Alarm

00008000 Fitting Restart Alrm

00010000 Not Used

00020000 Not Used

00040000 Not Used

00080000 Flow Switch Alarm

00100000 Validation Fail Alarm 1

00200000 Validation Fail Alarm 2

00400000 Not Used

00800000 Not Used

01000000 DeltaDC Restart Alrm

02000000 DeltaT Restart Alarm

04000000 Pressr Restart Alarm

08000000 New Scrubber Alarm

10000000 R2 Restart Alarm

20000000 R3 Restart Alarm

40000000 FracShft Restrt Alrm

80000000 Low Purge Rate Alrm



Validating the AnalyzerValidation of the analyzer using an appropriate gas standard is conducted automatically at the hour of day set by the Val Start Time parameter (or semi-automatically when initiated via the Validation DI or the Start Validation parameter on systems with automatic validation).

To validate automatically:1. Verify that the validation gas source(s) has been properly installed

and/or connected.

2. If necessary, set the current time, date and desired validation hour (see Table 4–1 for parameter default values).

3. Set the Daily Validation parameter to 1. The analyzer should run a validation cycle at the number of days and hour set by Val Interval and the Val Start Time parameter.

To validate semi-automatically:1. Verify that the validation gas source(s) has been properly installed

and/or connected.

2. Initiate a validation cycle by closing the contacts connected to the Validation DI input or by setting the Start Validation parameter to 1.

Once a validation cycle is underway, the appropriate relay (Val #1 Active or Val #2 Active) will be activated. If the concentration measured does not fall within the allowable limits (see “Validation Allowance” on page 4-30), the Validation Fail Alarm relay will activate. Once activated, the Validation Fail Alarm must be manually cancelled (see “Cancel Val Alarms” on page 4-17).

The keypad is disabled when Validation DI is active. Once Validation DI completes, the analyzer requires three to four minutes upon returning to Mode 1 to re-establish reference spectra before displaying a reading.

SpectraSensors recommends validating the analyzer using only the analyte mixed in the validation gas specified on the analyzer calibration report. A bottle of test gas with a certified concentration representing 50% of full scale) for single validation systems), or bottles representing 20% and 80% of full scale (for dual validation systems) are recommended.


4–40 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13


Calibrating the AnalyzerCalibrating the analyzer is typically not required under normal circumstances. SpectraSensors calibrates each analyzer to a National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) traceable standard before shipping the unit to the end user. Because SpectraSensors analyzers use a non-contact form of measurement, they are relatively insensitive to contamination, are quite rugged and virtually maintenance free ensuring years of reliable service.




4–42 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

5 - FIRMWARE FS 5.13 SERIAL PORT COMMUNICATIONS

Receiving Serial Data (Customer Port Output)When the Modbus Mode parameter is set to 0, the analyzer is configured to transfer a string of data from the analyzer to a serial device via the customer port output. The receiving device is typically a computer terminal running HyperTerminal, which is a program included with Microsoft® Windows® 95, 98, and XP that enables serial communication and the viewing, capturing and storage of serial port data and messages.

To launch HyperTerminal:1. On your Windows desktop, click Start followed by Run (usually

located in the lower right side of the Start Menu).

2. Type Hypertrm.exe and hit Return to launch HyperTerminal.

3. Once HyperTerminal is activated, the Connection Description window appears, as shown in Figure 5–1. Type in a Filename (where the terminal session settings will be stored for future recall) and click on any icon. Click OK.

4. The Connect To window appears prompting for a connection, as shown in Figure 5–2. Click the Menu Arrow under Connect Using to view the choices.

5. Click on the appropriate port to which your analyzer is connected (COM1, COM2, COM3, etc.) as established under “Connecting the Output Signals and Alarms” on page 2-15. Click OK.

6. Once the port is chosen, the COM Properties window appears. Make sure the COM properties for the port selected reflect those shown in Figure 5–3 (19200 baud or as set in Mode 2, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, no parity, and no flow control).

7. Click OK to establish the connection.

Once connected, the data will start streaming through the Hyperterminal Window as shown in Figure 5–4.

For faster access to HyperTerminal, save a HyperTerminal shortcut to the desktop.



Figure 5–1 Connection Description window (FS 5.13)

Figure 5–2 Connect To window (FS 5.13)

5–2 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

Firmware FS 5.13 Serial Port Communications

Figure 5–3 COM Properties window (FS 5.13)

Figure 5–4 Hyperterminal window with streaming data (FS 5.13)

Refer to data output headings in Figure 5–5; reading left to right


2-P

ack

H2 S

/H

2 O A

naly

zer S

yste

m

5–4

4900002006 rev. K

8-1

5-1

3

Figure 5–5 Sample diagnostic data output (FS 5.13)


The data string is tab delimited forming columns in the following order:

• Date: Current date (in MM:DD:YY)

• Time: Current time (in HH:MM:SS)

• Concentration (ppmv): Current measured analyte/component concentration (ppmv)

• Wet Temp (C): Current temperature (C) of the gas sample when normal sample gas is flowing

• Wet Pressure (mb): Current pressure (mb) of the gas sample when normal sample gas is flowing

• Dry Temp: Current temperature (0.0 for non-differential units) of the gas sample (in selected engineering units) when scrubbed sample gas is flowing.

• Dry Pressure: Current pressure (0.0 for non-differential units) of the gas sample (in selected engineering units) when scrubbed sample is flowing.

• Fit Residue: Value ranging from 0 to 1 indicating how well the measured spectrum fits the referenced spectrum, where 1 represents a perfect match.

• Fit Ratio: Ratio of the measured spectrum versus the Reference 1 spectrum.

• Dry DC: Signal level (laser intensity in counts, 0.0 for non-differential units) at the high end of the current ramp during the dry cycle.

• Wet DC: Signal level at the high end of the current ramp during the wet cycle.

• Peak Index: Peak index of the measured spectrum.

• Ref Index: Peak index used for reference.

• Index Difference: Difference between measured and reference peak indices, where a value other than 0 indicates peak tracking is functioning.

• Val Flg: Indicates current stream being measured (0 = Process, 1 = Va 1, 2 = Val 2).

• Process Path Flg: Calculation path (reference spectra) used for the concentration calculation (0 = Process Reference Spectra, 1 = Validation Reference Spectra).

• Current Midpoint: Current midpoint that the analyzer is using, including any peak tracking adjustments.

• Fit Ratio 2: Ratio of the measured spectrum versus the Reference 2 spectrum, where a value of 0 indicates that the Reference 2 spectrum was not used in the calculation of concentration.






• Fit Ratio Dry: Ratio of the measured spectrum versus the Reference Dry spectrum, where a value of 0 indicates that the Reference Dry spectrum was not used in the calculation of concentration.

• Fit Ratio Dry-1: Ratio of the measured spectrum versus the Reference Dry spectrum shifted by 1 index value, where a value of 0 indicates that the Reference Dry spectrum shifted by 1 index value was not used in the calculation of concentration.

• Alarm Flags: Value representing the status of each individual alarm in the analyzer, as listed in Table 4–2.

Any alarm messages would be transmitted along with the data string and would appear in a separate row.

To capture and save data from the serial port:1. To save the data from the serial port, use the Transfer/Capture

Text function and enter the Filename to where you would like to store the captured data.

2. To stop the capture of the serial data, click on Transfer/Capture Text/Stop.

To read diagnostic data with HyperTerminal:1. Before entering Mode 6, make sure the serial port on the computer

used for serial communication is connected to the analyzer and the output stream is showing on the screen as described under “To launch HyperTerminal” on page 5-1.

2. To save the data from the serial port, use the Transfer/Capture Text function and enter the Filename to where you would like to store the captured data.

The number of seconds between each line of data output should be the # Spectrum Average number set in Mode 2 divided by 4. The factory default setting of 16 for # Spectrum Average results in a line of output each 4 seconds.

5–6 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13


3. Once capturing is in place, enter Mode 6 by pressing # key followed by the 6 key.

The index shown on the LCD display counts by 50’s from 0 to 511. The analyzer will repetitively output this information until the # button is pressed. At the end of the data dump, the screen will display:

4. Press the # key followed by the 1 key to return to Mode 1.

5. Once normal operation resumes, stop the capture of the serial data. To stop the capture of the serial data, click on Transfer/Capture Text/Stop. The resulting data file contains the downloaded data as shown in Figure 5–5.

The 16 columns of tab delimited data in the file resulting from a Mode 6 data dump are labelled as follows:

• Index: Index value of points on spectrum scan curve

• Dry DC: Dry DC spectrum of sample gas

• Dry DC Ref 1: Reference 1 dry DC spectrum

• Wet DC: Wet DC spectrum of sample gas

• Wet DC Ref 1: Reference 1 wet DC spectrum

• Dry 2f: Dry AC spectrum of sample gas

• Wet 2f: Wet AC spectrum of sample gas

• Dry 2f Ref 1 Pdry: Reference 1 dry AC spectrum based on dry pressure

• Wet 2f Ref 1 PwetFR: Reference 1 wet AC spectrum based on wet pressure and adjusted for the current fitting ratio

+# 6


Index: 0

MODE



• 2f: AC spectrum of sample gas

• Ref 1: Reference 1 AC spectrum






• Val Ref: Reference Validation AC spectrum

• Val Ref Dry Pdry: Reference Validation dry AC spectrum based on dry pressure

• Val Ref Wet PwetFR: Reference Validation wet AC spectrum based on wet pressure and adjusted for the current fitting ratio

• Composite Ref: Recreated AC spectrum based on the reference curve fitting ratios

Modbus Communications ProtocolModbus is a serial communications protocol published by Modicon in 1979 for use with its programmable logic controllers (PLCs). It has become a de facto standard communications protocol in industry, and is now the most commonly available means of connecting industrial electronic devices. Modbus is used extensively in leu of other communications protocols because it is openly published and royalty-free, relatively easy to deploy, and capable of moving raw bits or words without placing many restrictions on vendors.

Modbus enables communication between many devices connected to the same network, for example, a supervisory computer with a remote terminal unit (RTU) in supervisory control and data acquisition (SCADA) systems.

The SpectraSensors analyzer acts as a slave in a master/slave(s) network of devices. It can receive queries from a master and send responses back using either Gould Modbus RTU protocol or Daniel Extended Modbus RTU protocol.

Framing/ProtocolThe transmission mode used to communicate is either Gould Modbus RTU or Daniel Modbus RTU with port parameters 9600 to 115200 (baud rate), 8 (data bits), 1 (stop bit), no (parity), and none (flow control/handshake).

The transmission mode is set by the user via the Modbus Mode parameter (see “To change parameters in Mode 2” on page 4-13). Note that the generic serial output (HyperTerminal) is disabled if either Gould or Daniel Modbus is selected.

5–8 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13


FunctionsAvailable functions are 0x03 (read holding registers), 0x06 (write to a single register), 0x10 (write to multiple registers), and 0x2B (read device identification).

AddressingThe analyzer's Modbus slave node address can be in the range of 0-250 with the default being 1. All analyzers will respond to an address of 0, so this address can be used to interrogate a single unit when its address is unknown or to determine its address.

See Table 5–1 for register definitions for both Gould and Daniel Modbus modes. Be aware that for Gould Modbus the table follows the convention of identifying the register with an offset of 40001. Therefore, the actual value transmitted in the starting register field of the command is the listed register value minus 40001 (e.g., register 47001 is addressed as 7000).

Reading/Writing in Daniel Modbus ModeDaniel Modbus supports three types of registers: short integer, long integer and floating point. Each “short integer” register is two bytes in length and will contain an integer value. Each “long integer” register is four bytes in length and will contain an integer value and each “floating point” register is four bytes in length and will contain a floating point value.

Reading/Writing in Gould Modbus ModeGould Modbus supports three types of variable data, short integer, long integer and floating point, but all registers are addressed as word (two byte) registers. A “short integer” value is contained in one register whereas a “long integer” or “floating point” value requires two contiguous registers. The registers are defined as Read or Read/Write.

An appropriate password must be downloaded to the password register prior to writing to most registers. The User Level 1 (L1) user password 3142 will allow access to those registers which have been pre-defined as user configurable. Other writable registers can only be downloaded or changed by SpectraSensors support personnel using a User Level 2 (L2) password.

EndiannessEndianness, often referred to as byte order, is the ordering of individually addressable sub-units (words, bytes, or even bits) within a longer data word.

Use caution when writing to registers as changing the value of a writable register may affect the calibration of the analyzer.



Byte orders with the most versus least significant byte first are called big-endian and little-endian, respectively. In SpectraSensors analyzers, all bytes are stores big-endian. Thus, for floating point and long-integer data types, the byte order will look like:

Note that floating point values follow the IEEE Standard for Floating-Point Arithmetic (IEEE 754-2008).

To enable Modbus communications:1. Confirm that the serial cable has been properly connected (see

“Connecting the Signals and Alarms” in the SS2100 Hardware Manual).

2. Power up the analyzer (see “Powering Up the Analyzer” on page 4-1).

3. Enter Mode 2 by pressing the # key followed by the 2 key.

The LCD prompts for a numeric password. Enter the user password (3142) on the keypad, then press the * key to enter the number to enter Mode 2 (Set Parameter Mode).

4. Press the * key repeatedly until the Modbus Address parameter is displayed.

HighWord-HighByte HighWord-LowByte LowWord-HighByte LowWord-LowByte


FS 5.13-XXXX

<SET PARAMETER MODE>Process Purge Time60Enter a value(secs)

<SET PARAMETER MODE>Modbus Address1Enter node (1-250)

5–10 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13


5. Enter the desired Modbus Address and press the * key to store the value and cycle to the Modbus Mode parameter.

6. Enter the desired Modbus Mode and press the * key to store the value (see “To change parameters in Mode 2” on page 4-13).

7. Enter the 2 Way Com Port assignment.

8. Press the # key followed by the 1 key to return to Mode 1.The analyzer is now ready to receive Modbus queries.

Table 5–1 Modbus register map [FS 5.13]

Parameter Daniel Reg.

Gould Reg.

Data Type Action Min. Max.

Concentration 7001 47001 Float Read - -

Temperature 7002 47003 Float Read - -

Pressure 7003 47005 Float Read - -

Concentration ppmv 7004 47007 Float Read - -

Wet Temp C 7005 47009 Float Read - -

Wet Pressure mb 7006 47011 Float Read - -

Fit Residue 7007 47013 Float Read - -

Current Midpoint 7008 47015 Float Read - -

DC Level 7010 47019 Float Read - -

Zero Level 7011 47021 Float Read - -

Val Date 7026 47051 Float Read - -

Val Time 7027 47053 Float Read - -

Val 1 Value 7028 47055 Float Read - -

Val 2 Value 7029 47057 Float Read - -


<SET PARAMETER MODE>2 Way Com Port 10:Off1:Cus2:Ser3:Eth



Table 5-1 Modbus register map [FS 5.13] (Continued)


Gould Reg.


Val 1 Value ppmv 7030 47059 Float Read - -

Val 2 Value ppmv 7031 47061 Float Read - -

Dry Temp C 7041 47081 Float Read - -

Dry Pressure mb 7042 47083 Float Read - -

Dry DC Level 7043 47085 Float Read - -

Common Weight 7051 47101 Float Read - -

Fitting Ratio 7052 47103 Float Read - -

Fitting Ratio 2 7053 47105 Float Read - -




Fitting Ratio Dry 7057 47113 Float Read - -

Fitting Ratio Dry-1 7058 47115 Float Read - -

Cross Shift 7060 47119 Float Read - -

Peak Track Index 7061 47121 Float Read - -

Peak Index Ref 7062 47123 Float Read - -

Peak Track Index Dry 7091 47181 Float Read - -

Peak Index Ref Dry 7092 47183 Float Read - -

RATA Multiplier 7101 47201 Float R/W L1 -1.00E+06 1.00E+06

RATA Offset 7102 47203 Float R/W L1 -1.00E+06 1.00E+06

Low Alarm Setpoint 7103 47205 Float R/W L1 0 1.00E+06

High Alarm Setpoint 7104 47207 Float R/W L1 0 1.00E+06

AO 4 mA Value 7105 47209 Float R/W L1 0 1.00E+05

AO 20 mA Value 7106 47211 Float R/W L1 0 1.00E+05

AO 4-20 mA Test 7107 47213 Float R/W L1 0 100

AI 4 mA Value 7108 47215 Float R/W L1 0 499999

AI 20 mA Value 7109 47217 Float R/W L1 0 499999

Val 1 Concentration 7110 47219 Float R/W L1 0 1.00E+06

Val 2 Concentration 7111 47221 Float R/W L1 0 1.00E+06

Validation Allowance 7112 47223 Float R/W L1 0 100

Zero Val Tolerance 7113 47225 Float R/W L1 0 1.00E+06

5–12 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13


Table 5-1 Modbus register map (Continued)


Gould Reg.


Pipeline Pressure 7125 47249 Float R/W L1 5000 499999

ppmv ConvFactor 00 7139 47277 Float R/W L1 -1.00E+06 1.00E+06

lb ConvFactor 01 7140 47279 Float R/W L1 -1.00E+06 1.00E+06

% ConvFactor 02 7141 47281 Float R/W L1 -1.00E+06 1.00E+06

mg ConvFactor 03 7142 47283 Float R/W L1 -1.00E+06 1.00E+06

ppmw ConvFactor 04 7143 47285 Float R/W L1 -1.00E+06 1.00E+06

ppbv ConvFactor 05 7144 47287 Float R/W L1 -1.00E+06 1.00E+06

ppbw ConvFactor 06 7145 47289 Float R/W L1 -1.00E+06 1.00E+06

grn ConvFactor 07 7146 47291 Float R/W L1 -1.00E+06 1.00E+06

user ConvFactor 08 7147 47293 Float R/W L1 -1.00E+06 1.00E+06

Val Perm Constant Kp 7212 47423 Float R/W L1 0 1.00E+06

Val Perm Rate Rp 7213 47425 Float R/W L1 0 1.00E+06

Alarm Flags 5001 45001 Long Read - -

Status Flags 5002 45003 Long Read - -

DO Alarm Setup 5101 45201 Long R/W L1 0 4.29E+09

user EU Tag Part 1 5102 45203 Long R/W L1 0 4.29E+09

user EU Tag Part 2 5103 45205 Long R/W L1 0 4.29E+09

Serial Date 3001 43001 Integer Read - -

Serial Number 3002 43002 Integer Read - -

Current 2F Flag 3103 43103 Integer Read - -

Logger Rate 3202 43202 Integer R/W L1 1 1000

4-20 mA Alarm Action 3204 43204 Integer R/W L1 0 3

Temperature Unit 3205 43205 Integer R/W L1 0 1

Pressure Unit 3206 43206 Integer R/W L1 0 3

Concentration Unit 3207 43207 Integer R/W L1 0 8

Modbus Address 3208 43208 Integer R/W L1 0 250

Modbus Mode 3209 43209 Integer R/W L1 0 2

AI Pressure Input 3210 43210 Integer R/W L1 0 1

RATA 3211 43211 Integer R/W L1 0 1

New Scrub Installed 3212 43212 Integer R/W L1 0 1

General Alarm DO 3213 43213 Integer R/W L1 0 2

Baud Rate 3214 43214 Integer R/W L1 0 4



Modbus Accessible Parameter Definitions

For definitions of the Modbus accessible parameters shown in Table 5–1, see below. For more detailed information, refer to “Measurement and Control Parameters Defined” on page 4-13.

• % ConvFactor 02: Sets a custom conversion factor when the parameter Concentration Unit = 2 (%) and this value is greater than 0.0. When it is equal to 0.0, the default conversion factor is used.

Table 5-1 Modbus register map (Continued)


Gould Reg.


Set Time - Year 3215 43215 Integer R/W L1 2007 2143

Set Time - Month 3216 43216 Integer R/W L1 1 12

Set Time - Day 3217 43217 Integer R/W L1 1 31

Set Time - Hour 3218 43218 Integer R/W L1 0 23

Set Time - Minute 3219 43219 Integer R/W L1 0 59

Cancel Val Alarms 3220 43220 Integer R/W L1 0 1

Daily Validation 3221 43221 Integer R/W L1 0 1

Val Start Time 3222 43222 Integer R/W L1 0 23

Val Interval 3223 43223 Integer R/W L1 1 400

Start Validation 3224 43224 Integer R/W L1 0 1

Val Purge Period 3225 43225 Integer R/W L1 0 4000

Val Duration 3226 43226 Integer R/W L1 0 8000

Val Attempts 3227 43227 Integer R/W L1 1 8000

4-20 mA Val Action 3228 43228 Integer R/W L1 0 1

Val Auto DumpSpec-trm

3230 43230 Integer R/W L1 0 1

Calculate Dew Point 3252 43252 Integer R/W L1 0 2

Dew Point Method 3253 43253 Integer R/W L1 0 3

2 Way Com Port 3365 43365 Integer R/W L1 0 3

Keypad Watchdog 3368 43368 Integer R/W L1 0 9999

Rapid Change Monitor 3402 43402 Integer R/W L1 0 1

Process Purge Time 3408 43408 Integer R/W L1 60 9999

Custom Precision 3413 43413 Integer R/W L1 0 5

Peak Tracking 3419 43419 Integer R/W L1 0 2

Password 4999 44999 Integer R/W L0 0 9999

5–14 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13


• 2 Way Com Port: Sets the port that allows two-way communications, including Modbus and the diagnostic protocol.

• 4-20 mA Alarm Action: Determines the current loop state upon an alarm condition.

• 4-20 mA Val Action: Sets the operation mode of the 4-20 mA current loop during validation cycles.

• AI 4 mA Value: Sets the pipeline pressure (in mbar) corresponding to a 4 mA current loop input.

• AI 20 mA Value: Sets the pipeline pressure (in mbar) corresponding to a 20 mA current loop input.

• AI Pressure Input: Enables or disables the analog input pipeline pressure capability.

• AO 4mA Value: Sets the concentration (in ppmv) or dew point temperature (in degrees Celsius or Fahrenheit) corresponding to a 4 mA current loop output.

• AO 20mA Value: Sets the concentration (in ppmv) or dew point temperature (in degrees Celsius or Fahrenheit) corresponding to a 20 mA current loop output.

• AO 4-20 mA Test: Sets the 4-20 mA output to a percentage of full scale when in Mode 5.

• Alarm Flags: Long integer register identifying the current status of each individual alarm in the analyzer, as shown in Table 4–3.

• Baud Rate: Sets the baud rate for the customer port.

• Calculate Dew Point: Enables the calculation of the dew point value and controls where the value will be output.

• Cancel Val Alarms: Cancels all validation alarms once activated.

• Common Weight: Ratio of the measured spectrum that did not match a reference spectrum.

• Concentration: Current measured (live) analyte concentration in selected engineering units.

• Concentration ppmv: Current measured (live) analyte concentration in parts per million by volume (ppmv).

• Concentration Unit: Sets the display units for the measured concentration.

• Cross Shift: The amount of shift applied to match the measured spectrum to the reference spectrum when using Cross Correlation.

• Current 2F Flag: Displays the current scrubber protection usage level: 0 = standard protection (used for non-differential units), 1 = mid protection, 2 = high protection, 3 = max protection (no usage).

• Current Midpoint: Current midpoint that the analyzer is using, including any peak tracking adjustments.



• Custom Precision: Sets the number of viewable digits to the right of the decimal point.

• Daily Validation: Enables or disables the autovalidation feature.

• DC Level: Signal level at the high end of the current ramp.

• Dew Point Method: Sets the type of dew point calculation to be performed when Calculate Dew Point is enabled.

• DO Alarm Setup: Sets the functionality of the Assignable Alarm.

• Dry DC Level: Signal level at the high end of the current ramp during the dry cycle.

• Dry Pressure mb: Current measured dry pressure of the gas sample in millibar (mb)

• Dry Temp C: Current measured dry temperature of the gas sample in degrees in celsius.

• Fit Residue: Value ranging from 0 to 1 indicating how well the measured spectrum fit the referenced spectrum, where 1 represents a perfect match.

• Fitting Ratio: Ratio of the measured spectrum versus the Reference 1 or Validation spectrum.

• Fitting Ratio 2: Ratio of the measured spectrum versus the Reference 2 spectrum, where a value of 0 indicates that the Reference 2 spectrum was not used in the calculation of concentration.




• Fitting Ratio Dry: Ratio of the measured spectrum versus the Reference Dry spectrum, where a value of 0 indicates that the Reference Dry spectrum was not used in the calculation of concentration.

• Fitting Ratio Dry-1: Ratio of the measured spectrum versus the Reference Dry spectrum shifted by 1 index value, where a value of 0 indicates that the Reference Dry spectrum shifted by 1 index value was not used in the calculation of concentration.

5–16 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13


• General Alarm DO: Sets the operation of the general alarm relay digital output when a general fault alarm occurs.

• grn ConvFactor 07: Sets a custom conversion factor when the parameter Concentration Unit = 7 (grains/100scf) and this value is greater than 0.0. The default conversion factor is used when it is equal to 0.0.

• High Alarm Setpoint: Determines the concentration threshold above which the Concentra High Alarm will be triggered.

• Keypad Watchdog: Sets the allowable time (in seconds) that the analyzer can be on the MODE screen and the Mode 2 (Set Parameter Mode) password screen before automatically reverting to Mode 1 (Normal Mode).

• lb ConvFactor 01: Sets a custom conversion factor when the parameter Concentration Unit = 1 (lbs/MMscf) and this value is greater than 0.0. The default conversion factor is used when it is equal to 0.0.

• Logger Rate: Sets the number of measurements included in the running average.

• Low Alarm Setpoint: Determines the concentration threshold below which the Concentra Low Alarm will be triggered.

• mg ConvFactor 03: Sets a custom conversion factor when the parameter Concentration Unit = 3 (mg/Nm3) and this value is greater than 0.0. The default conversion factor is used when it is equal to 0.0.

• Modbus Address: Sets the analyzer address when the analyzer is used as a Modbus slave device.

• Modbus Mode: Sets the communications protocol for the port selected by the 2 Way Com Port parameter.

• New Scrub Installed: Resets the scrubber/dryer alarm once activated, and the scrubber/dryer lifetime monitor.

• Password: Required to access the system to download (i.e., change) register settings.

• Pipeline Pressure: Sets the pipeline pressure (in mbar) in the current dew point calculation or, if enabled, displays the current pipeline pressure input through the AI Pressure Input.

• Pressure: Current measured (live) wet pressure reading of the gas sample in selected engineering units.

• Pressure Unit: Designates the display units for the measured absolute pressure in the cell.

• Peak Index Ref: Peak index used for reference.

• Peak Index Ref Dry: Peak index (0.0 for non-differential units) used for reference from the last scrubber cycle.



• Peak Track Index: Peak index of the measured spectrum.

• Peak Track Index Dry: Peak index (0.0 for non-differential units) of the measured spectrum from the last scrubber cycle.

• Peak Tracking: A software utility that periodically adjusts the laser current to keep the absorption peak of the measured component at a known location.

• ppbv ConvFactor 05: Sets a custom conversion factor when the parameter Concentration Unit = 5 (ppbv) and this value is greater than 0.0. When it is equal to 0.0, the default conversion factor is used.

• ppbw ConvFactor 06: Sets a custom conversion factor when the parameter Concentration Unit = 6 (ppbw) and this value is greater than 0.0. When it is equal to 0.0, the default conversion factor is used.

• ppmv ConvFactor 00: Sets a custom conversion factor when the parameter Concentration Unit = 0 (ppmv) and this value is greater than 0.0. The default conversion factor is used when it is equal to 0.0.

• ppmw ConvFactor 04: Sets a custom conversion factor when the parameter Concentration Unit = 4 (ppmw) and this value is greater than 0.0. The default conversion factor is used when it is equal to 0.0.

• Process Purge Time: Sets the time in seconds that the analyzer will purge the system with process gas before starting a dry cycle when switching to the process stream after a validation.

• Rapid Change Monitor: Enables or disables the dynamic logger rate based on the concentration rate of change.

• RATA: Enables or disables user definable values that allow adjustment (without affecting the factory calibration) of the analyzer reading in the field.

• RATA Multiplier: User definable value that enables adjustment (without affecting the factory calibration) of the analyzer response (or slope) in the field.

• RATA Offset: User definable value that enables adjustment (without affecting the factory calibration) of the analyzer offset in the field.

• Serial Date: Date the analyzer was calibrated.

• Serial Number: Serial number of the analyzer.

• Set Time - Day: Sets the current day for the clock driving daily validations.

• Set Time - Hour: Sets the current hour for the clock driving daily validations.

• Set Time - Minute: Sets the current minute for the clock driving daily validations.

5–18 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13


• Set Time - Month: Sets the current month for the clock driving daily validations.

• Set Time - Year: Sets the current year for the clock driving daily validations.

• Start Validation: Initiates the validation cycle.

• Status Flags: Long integer register identifying the occurrence of various events in the analyzer, as shown in Table 5–2.

• Temperature: Current measured (live) wet temperature of the gas sample in selected engineering units.

• Temperature Unit: Designates the display units for the measured cell temperature.

• user ConvFactor 08: Sets a custom conversion factor when the parameter Concentration Unit = 8 (user EU Tag Part 1 and 2) and this value is greater than 0.0. The default conversion factor is used when it is equal to 0.0.

• user EU Tag Part 1: Sets a custom engineering unit tag name for the beginning four ASCII characters. For example: A is ASCII hex value 41, so AAAA would be 41414141, which would be 1,094,795,585 in decimal format. Refer to Table 5–3.

• user EU Tag Part 2: Sets a custom engineering unit tag name for the last four ASCII characters. For example: A is ASCII hex value 41, so AAAA would be 41414141, which would be 1,094,795,585 in decimal format. Refer to Table 5–3.

Table 5–2 Status flags

Bit HexValue Status

0 00001 Current measurement valid (wet cycle active)

1 00002 Wet purging complete, wet measurement in progress

2 00004 Wet purging in progress

3 00008 Dry purging complete, dry measurement in progress

4 00010 Dry purging in progress

5 00020 Validation Mode

6 00040 Validation Flag 1

7 00080 Validation Flag 2



To find the hexadecimal value in Table 5–3, first find the character needed in the table. Trace to the reference number in the column header (c) at the top of the table, then to the row to the left (r) to create the value (cr). For example, locate the ‘A’ in the table. The ‘A’ corresponds with the value (4) in the column header at the top of the table. Next, follow the row in which ‘A’ is present to the value at the left of the table (1). Combined, these cre-ate the hexadecimal value of 41.

• Val 1 Concentration: Sets the concentration value of validation gas supply #1.

• Val 2 Concentration: Sets the concentration value of validation gas supply #2.

Table 5–3 ASCII Character Map

5–20 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13


• Val 1 Value: Measured analyte concentration of last validation 1 reading in selected engineering units.

• Val 2 Value: Measured analyte concentration of last validation 2 reading in selected engineering units.

• Val 1 Value ppmv: Measured analyte concentration of last validation 1 reading in parts per million by volume (ppmv)

• Val 2 Value ppmv: Measured analyte concentration of last validation 2 reading in parts per million by volume (ppmv)

• Val Attempts: Sets the maximum number of failures of the analyzer to measure the validation gas within the set tolerances before stopping the autovalidation sequence and triggering a Validation Fail Alarm.

• Val Auto DumpSpectrm: Determines whether a Mode 6 dump automatically occurs after each validation measurement.

• Val Date: Date of the last validation.

• Validation Allowance: Sets the tolerance (±%) for validation measurements when Val 1 Concentration or Val 2 Concentration is set to a value greater than 0.

• Val Duration: Sets the total number of seconds a validation cycle will run.

• Val Interval: Sets the number of days between autovalidation cycles.

• Val Perm Constant Kp: Sets the system constant that is determined at the factory at the time of calibration.

• Val Perm Rate Rp: Sets the permeation rate in ng/min referenced on the certification for the permeation device.

• Val Purge Period: Sets the number of seconds the analyzer will purge the system with validation gas before starting a dry cycle upon validation initiation.

• Val Start Time: Sets the hour of the day for the daily autovalidation to begin.

• Val Time: Time of the last validation.

• Wet Pressure mb: Current measured (live) wet pressure reading of the gas sample in millibar (mb).

• Wet Temp C: Current measured (live) temperature of the gas sample in degrees celsius.

• Zero level: Signal level when the laser is turned off.

• Zero Val Tolerance: Used to set the maximum acceptable reading when validating with zero gas.




5–22 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

6 - ETHERNET COMMUNICATIONS

Configuring the Ethernet PortThe ethernet port must be properly configured to communicate on a network with a serial device. The ethernet port has been factory set as follows:

• IP Address: 192.168.0.1

• Data Port: 10001

• Configuration Port: 9999

The configuration is stored in nonvolatile memory and is retained without power. The configuration can be changed at any time.

If the IP address or any other setting needs to be changed, the ethernet port Setup Mode can be accessed using a Telnet connection to configure the port locally or over the network.

To configure the ethernet port:•1. On your Windows desktop, click Start followed by Run (usually


2. Type the following command: telnet 192.168.0.1 9999.

3. Click OK to establish a Telnet connection. The following message appears:

MAC address XXXXXXXXXXXX (E.g., 00204A808BE8)Software version V6.3.0.3RC3 (061110) (Version may vary by system)

Press Enter for Setup Mode

4. To enter Setup Mode, press Enter within 5 seconds. The configuration settings display, followed by the Change Setup menu.

Change Setup:0 Server1 Channel 15 Expert6 Security7 Defaults8 Exit without save9 Save and exit Your choice ?

5. Select an option on the menu by entering the number of the option in the “Your choice ?” field and pressing Enter.

6. To enter a value for a parameter, type the value and press Enter, or to confirm a current value, just press Enter.

7. When finished, save the new configuration (option 9). The port will reboot after the configuration has been stored.



Setup Mode: Server Configuration (Option 0)The unit’s basic network parameters display when you select Server Configuration (option 0). The IP Address, Set Gateway IP Address, and Netmask fields display the current values.

IP Address : (192) .(168) .(000) .(001)Set Gateway IP Address (Y) ?Gateway IP addr (192) .(168) .(000) .(001)Netmask: Number of Bits for Host Part (0=default) (16)Change telnet config password (N) ?

IP AddressIf DHCP is not used to assign IP addresses, enter the IP address manually. The IP address must be set to a unique value in the network. Enter each octet and press Enter between each section. The current value displays in parentheses.

IP Address : (000) (000) (000) (000) _

If DHCP is used, the third octet of the IP address sets the BootP/DHCP/AutoIP options. To disable an option, set the appropriate bit according to Table 6–1.

For example, if the third octet is 0.0.5.0, the AutoIP and BootP options are disabled; only DHCP is enabled. (The value 5 results from adding the binary equivalents of 0 and 2.) This is the most common setting when using DHCP.

Set Gateway IP AddressThe gateway address, or router, allows communication to other LAN segments. The gateway address should be the IP address of the router connected to the same LAN segment as the unit. The gateway address must be within the local network. The default is N (No), meaning the gateway address has not been set. To set the gateway address, type Y and enter the address.

Set Gateway IP Adress (N) ? YGateway IP addr (000) (000) (000) (000)_

Netmask: Number of Bits for Host PartA netmask defines the number of bits taken from the IP address that are assigned for the host part.

Table 6–1 BootP/DHCP/AutoIP options

Bit Option

0 AutoIP

1 DHCP

2 BootP

6–2 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

Ethernet Communications

Netmask: Number of Bits for Host Part (0=default) (0) _

The unit prompts for the number of host bits to be entered, then calculates the netmask, which appears in standard decimal-dot notation, as shown in Table 6–2, when the saved parameters display.

Change Telnet Configuration PasswordSetting the Data configuration password prevents unauthorized access to the setup menu through a Data connection to port 9999. The password must have four characters.

Change telnet config password (N) ? _

DHCP NameIf a DHCP server has automatically assigned the IP address and network settings, this address does not appear in the unit’s Setup Mode. You can discover the unit by using Monitor Mode (see “Monitor Mode” on page 6-21).)

There are three methods for assigning DHCP names to the unit:

• Default DHCP Name: If the DHCP name has not been changed and an IP of 0.0.0.0 is being used, the DHCP name defaults to CXXXXXX [XXXXXX is the last 6 digits of the MAC (hardware) address shown on the label on the bottom/side of the ethernet port]. For example, if the MAC address is 00-20-4A-12-34-56, then the default DHCP name is C123456.

• Custom DHCP Name: If using an IP address of 0.0.0.0, the last option in Server Configuration is “Change DHCP device name.” This

Table 6–2 Standard IP network netmasks

Network Class Host Bits Netmask

A 24 255.0.0.0

B 16 255.255.0.0

C 8 255.255.255.0

A password is not necessary to access the Setup Mode window via a serial connection.

When Monitor Mode is accessed from the serial port with network connection enabled, issuing the NC (Network Communication) command will display the unit’s IP configuration.



option allows the DHCP name to be changed to an alphanumeric name (XPort Direct in this example).

Change DHCP device name (not set) ? (N) YEnter new DHCP device name : XPort Direct

• Numeric DHCP Name: The DHCP name can be changed by specifying the last octet of the IP address. When using this method, the DHCP name would be XPort DirectYY, where YY represents the last octet of the IP address. For example, if the IP address is 0.0.0.12, then the DHCP name would be XPort Direct12. This method only works with 2-digit numbers (01-99).

Setup Mode: Channel Configuration (Option 1)The unit’s serial port parameters display when you select Channel 1 (option 1) from the Change Setup menu.

Change Setup:0 Server1 Channel 15 Expert6 Security7 Defaults8 Exit without save9 Save and exit Your choice ? 1

These parameters define how the serial port responds to network and serial communications. The following sections describe the configurable parameters within the Channel Configuration menu.

Baud RateThe unit and attached serial device, such as a modem, must agree on a speed or baud rate to use for the serial connection. Valid baud rates are 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600 (default), 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200, and 230400 bits per second.

Baudrate (9600) ?

I/F (Interface) ModeThe Interface Mode is a bit-coded byte entered in hexadecimal notation.

I/F Mode (4C) ?

Interface Mode options are listed in Table 6–3.

Note that all bit positions in the table that are blank represent “don’t care” bits for that particular option, which can be set to a value of 0 or 1. Some common Interface Mode settings are listed in Table 6–4.

6–4 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13


FlowFlow control sets the local handshaking method for stopping serial input/output.

Flow (00) ?

Flow control options are listed in Table 6–5.

Table 6–3 Interface Mode options

I/F Mode Option 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

RS-232Ca 0 0

RS-422/485 4-wireb 0 1

RS-485 2-wireb 1 1

7 Bit 1 0

8 Bit 1 1

No Parity 0 0

Even Parity 1 1

Odd Parity 0 1

1 stop bit 0 1

2 stop bitsa 1 1

a. 2 stop bits are implemented by the software. This might influence perfor-mance.

b. The RTS pin is used for RS-485 transmitter control.

Table 6–4 Common Interface Mode settings

I/F Mode Setting Binary Hex

RS-232C, 8-bit, No Parity, 1 stop bit 0100 1100 4C

RS-232C, 7-bit, Even Parity, 1 stop bit 0111 1000 78

RS-485 2-wire, 8-bit, No Parity, 1 stop bit 0100 1111 4F

RS-422, 8-bit, Odd Parity, 1 stop bit 0101 1101 5D

Table 6–5 Flow control options

Flow Control Option Hex

No flow control 00

XON/XOFF flow control 01

Hardware handshake with RTS/CTS lines 02

XON/XOFF pass characters to host 05



Port NumberThis setting represents the source port number in TCP connections, which identifies the channel for initiating connections remotely.

Port No (10001) ?

The default setting for Port 1 is 10001. The range is 1-65535, except for the reserved port numbers listed in Table 6–6.

Use Port 0 for the outgoing local port to change with each connection. The port range is 50,000 to 59,999. Each subsequent connection increments the number by 1 (it wraps back around to 50,000).

Only use this automatic port increment feature to initiate a connection using TCP. Set the port to a non-zero value when the unit is in a passive mode or when using UDP instead of TCP.

Connect ModeConnect Mode options entered in hexadecimal format define how the unit makes a connection, and how it reacts to incoming connections over the network.

ConnectMode (C0) ?

Connect Mode options are listed in Table 6–7. Note that all bit positions in the table that are blank represent “don’t care” bits for that particular option, which can be set to a value of 0 or 1.

a) Incoming Connection

b) Response

c) Active Startup

To enable the hostlist:

1. Enter a Connect Mode of 0x20 (2X), where X is any digit. The menu shows you a list of current entries already defined in the unit.

Table 6–6 Reserved port numbers

Port Number Designation

1–1024 Reserved (well known ports)

9999 Telnet setup

14000–14009 Reserved for Redirector

30704 Reserved (77F0h)

30718 Reserved (77FEh)

6–6 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13


Baudrate (9600) ?I/F Mode (4C) ?Flow (00) ?Port No (10001) ?

Table 6–7 Connect Mode options

Connect Mode Option 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

a) Incoming Connection

Never Accept Incoming 0 0 0

Accept with active Modem Control In 0 1 0

Always Accept (default) 1 1 0

b) Response

Nothing (default) 0

Character Response (C, D or N) 1

c) Active Startup

No Active Startup (default) 0 0 0 0

With Any Character 0 0 0 1

With active Modem Control In 0 0 1 0

With a Specific Start Character 0 0 1 1

Manual Connection 0 1 0 0

Autostart 0 1 0 1

Hostlist 0 0 1 0

d) Datagram Type

Directed UDP 1 1 0 0

e) Modem Mode

No Echo 0 0 1 1

Data Echo & Modem Response (Numeric) 0 1 1 1 1

Data Echo & Modem Response (Verbose) 0 1 1 1 0

Modem Response Only (Numeric) 0 0 1 1 1 1

Modem Response Only (Verbose) 0 0 1 1 1 0

Never Accept Incom-ing

Rejects all external connection attempts.

Accept with active Modem Control In

Accepts external connection requests only when the Modem Con-trol In input is asserted. Cannot be used with Modem Mode.

Always Accept (default)

Accepts any incoming connection when a connection is not already established.



ConnectMode (C0) ?Send ‘+++’ in Modem Mode (Y) ?Auto increment source port (N) ?

Hostlist :01. IP : 172.019.000.001 Port : 0002301. IP : 172.019.000.002 Port : 0300101. IP : 172.019.000.003 Port : 10001

Change Hostlist ? (N) ? _

2. To delete, modify, or add an entry, enter Y.

Change Hostlist ? (N) ? Y01. IP address : (172) .(019) .(000) .(001) Port : (23) ?01. IP address : (172) .(019) .(000) .(002) Port : (3001) ?01. IP address : (172) .(019) .(000) .(003) Port : (10001) ?

3. By entering an IP address of 0.0.0.0, that entry and all others after it are deleted.

01. IP address : (000) .(000) .(000) .(000)Hostlist :01. IP : 172.019.000.001 Port : 0002301. IP : 172.019.000.002 Port : 0300101. IP : 172.019.000.003 Port : 10001

Change Hostlist ? (N) ? _

4. After completing the hostlist, repeat the previous step if necessary to edit the hostlist again. When finished, enter N or press Return.

Change Hostlist ? (N) ? NHostlist Retrycounter (3) ?

5. For Retrycounter, enter the number of times the unit should try to make a good network connection to a hostlist entry that it has successfully ARPed. The range is 1-15, with the default set to 3.

Hostlist Retrytimeout (250) ?

6. For Retrytimeout, enter the number of seconds the unit should wait before failing an attempted connection. The time is stored as units of milliseconds in the range of 1-65535. The default is 250.

Nothing (default) Nothing is transmitted.

Character Response (C, D or N)

A single character is transmitted to the serial port when there is a change in connection state:C = connected, D = disconnected, N = host unreachable.

The IP address of the host connecting to the port will be provided when you use verbose mode.

This option is overridden when Active Start Modem Mode or Active Start Hostlist is in effect.

6–8 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13


No Active Startup (default)

Does not attempt to initiate a connection under any circumstance.

With Any Character Attempts to connect when any character is received from the serial port.

With active Modem Control In

Attempts to connect when the Modem Control In input changes from not asserted to asserted.

With a Specific Start Character

Attempts to connect when it receives a specific start character from the serial port. The default start character is carriage return.

Manual Connection Attempts to connect when directed by a command string received from the serial port. The first character of the command string must be a C (ASCII 0x43), and the last character must be either a carriage return (ASCII 0x0D) or a line feed (0x0A). No blanks or space characters may be in the command string. Between the first and last command string characters must be a full or partial desti-nation IP address and may be a destination port number.

The IP address must be in standard decimal-dot notation and may be a partial address, representing the least significant 1, 2, or 3 bytes of the remote IP address. The period is required between each pair of IP address numbers.

If present, the port number must follow the IP address, be pre-sented as a decimal number in the range 1-65535, and be pre-ceded by a forward slash (ASCII 0x2F). The slash separates the IP address and the port number. If you omit the port number from a command string, the internally stored remote port number starts a connection.

If a partial IP address is presented in a command string, it is interpreted to be the least significant bytes of the IP address and uses the internally stored remote IP address to provide the most significant bytes of the IP address. If the IP address entered is 0.0.0.0/0, the port enters Monitor Mode.

For example, if the remote IP address already configured in the unit is 129.1.2.3, then an example command string would be C3/7, which would connect to 129.1.2.3 and port 7. A different ending for the connection string may also be used. For example, C50.1/23 would connect to 129.1.50.1 and port 23.

Autostart If Autostart is enabled, the unit automatically connects to the remote IP address and remote port specified when the port firm-ware starts.

Hostlist If this option is enabled, the unit scrolls through the hostlist until it connects to a device listed in the hostlist table. Once it con-nects, the unit stops trying to connect to any other devices. If this connection fails, the unit continues to scroll through the table until it is able to connect to another device in the hostlist.

The hostlist supports a minimum of 1 and a maximum of 12 entries. Each entry contains the IP address and the port number. The hostlist is disabled for Manual Mode and Modem Mode. The unit does not accept a data connection from a remote device when the hostlist option is enabled.



d) Datagram Type

e) Modem Mode

In Modem (Emulation) Mode, the unit presents a modem interface to the attached serial device. It accepts AT-style modem commands and handles the modem signals correctly.

To select Modem Mode, set the Connect Mode to C6 (no echo), D6 (echo with full verbose), D7 (echo with numeric response), CF (modem responses only, numeric response), or CE (modem responses only, full verbose).

Received commands must begin with the two-character sequence AT and be terminated with a carriage return character.

Directed UDP Enter 01 for directed or broadcast UDP. Datagrams of type 01 can be sent as a broadcast by enabling the Send as Broadcast option. The default is not to broadcast.

When the UDP option is in effect, the unit never attempts to initiate a TCP connection because it uses UDP datagrams to send and receive data.

If the unit is in Modem Mode, and the serial port is idle, the unit can still accept network TCP connections to the serial port if Connect Mode is set to C6 (no echo), D6 (echo with full verbose), D7 (echo with numeric response, CF (modem responses only, numeric response), or CE (modem responses only, full verbose).

No Echo In Modem Mode, echo refers to the echo of all of the characters entered in command mode; it does not mean to echo data that is transferred. Quiet Mode (no echo) refers to the modem not sending an answer to the commands received (or displaying what was typed).

Data Echo & Modem Response (Numeric)

The unit echoes modem commands and responds to a command with a numeric response.

Data Echo & Modem Response (Verbose)

The unit echoes modem commands and responds to a command with a message string shown in Table 6–8.

Modem Response Only (Numeric)

The unit does not echo modem commands and responds to a command with a numeric response.

Modem Response Only (Verbose)

The unit does not echo modem commands and responds to a command with a message string shown in Table 6–9.

6–10 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13


The unit ignores any character sequence received not starting with AT, and only recognizes and processes single AT-style commands. The unit treats compound AT commands as unrecognized commands.

If the Full Verbose option is in effect, the unit responds to an unrecognized command string that is otherwise formatted correctly (begins with AT and ends with carriage return) with the "OK" message and takes no further action.

If the Numeric Response option is in effect, the unit responds to an unrecognized command string that is otherwise formatted correctly with the "OK" message and takes no further action.

When an active connection is in effect, the unit transfers data and does not process commands received from the serial interface.

When a connection is terminated or lost, the unit reverts to command mode.

Table 6–8 Modem Mode messages

Message Meaning

Verbose

OK Command was executed without error.

CONNECT A network connection has been established.

NO CARRIER A network connection has been closed.

RING n.n.n.n A remote device, having IP address n.n.n.n, is connecting to this device.

Numeric

0 OK

1 Connected

2 Ring

3 No Carrier

4 Error

Table 6–9 Modem Mode commands

Command Function

ATDTx.x.x.x,pppp or ATDTx.x.x.x/pppp ATDTx.x.x.x:pppp

Makes a connection to an IP address (x.x.x.x) and a remote port num-ber (pppp).

ATDTx.x.x.x Makes a connection to an IP address (x.x.x.x) and the remote port number defined within the unit.

ATD0.0.0.0 Forces the unit into Monitor Mode if a remote IP address and port number are defined within the unit.

ATD Forces the unit into Monitor Mode if a remote IP address and port number are not defined within the unit.



When an active connection is in effect, the unit terminates the connection if it receives the following sequence from the attached serial device:

• No serial data is received for one second.

• The character sequence +++ is received, with no more than one second between each two characters.

• No serial data is received for one second after the last + character. At this time, the unit responds affirmatively per the selected echo/response mode.

• The character string ATH is received, terminated with a carriage return. The unit responds affirmatively according to the selected echo/response mode and drops the network connection. The serial interface reverts to accepting command strings.

If this sequence is not followed, the unit remains in data transfer mode.

Send the Escape Sequence (+++) in Modem Mode

Send ‘+++’ in Modem Mode (Y) ? _

Disable or enable the unit’s ability to send the escape sequence. The default is Y (Yes), to send the escape sequence.

Table 6-9 Modem Mode commands (Continued)

Command Function

ATDx.x.x.x Makes a connection to an IP address (x.x.x.x) and the remote port num-ber defined within the unit.

ATH Hangs up the connection (entered as +++ATH).

ATS0=n Enables or disables connections from the network going to the serial port.n=0 disables the ability to make a connection from the network to the serial port.n=1-9 enables the ability to make a connection from the network to the serial port.n>1-9 is invalid.

ATEn Enables or disables character echo and responses.n=0 disables character echo and responses.n=1 enables character echo and responses.

ATVn Enables numeric response or full verbose.n=0 enables numeric response.n=1 enables full verbose.

The unit recognizes these AT commands as single commands such as ATE0 or ATV1; it does not recognize compound commands such as ATE0V.

6–12 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13


Show IP addr after 'RING'

Show IP addr after ‘RING’ (Y) ? _

Disable or enable the unit's ability to show the IP address after RING in Modem Mode. The default is Y (Yes), to show the IP address.

Auto Increment Source Port

Auto increment source port (N) ? _

Y (Yes) auto increments the source port. The unit increments the port number used with each new connection.

Remote IP AddressThis is the destination IP address used with an outgoing connection.

Remote IP Address : (000) (000) (000) (000)_

Remote PortThe remote TCP port number for the unit must be set to make outgoing connections. This parameter defines the port number on the target host to which a connection is attempted.

Remote Port (0) ? _

To connect an ASCII terminal to a host using the unit for login purposes, use the remote port number 23 (Internet standard port number for Telnet services).

DisConnModeDisconnect Mode options entered in hexadecimal format determine the conditions under which the unit will cause a network connection to terminate.

DisConnMode (00) ?

This option does not display when Hostlist is enabled from the ConnectMode prompt (see “Connect Mode” on page 6-6 for more information).

This option does not display when Hostlist is enabled from the ConnectMode prompt (see “Connect Mode” on page 6-6 for more information).



Disconnect Mode options are listed in Table 6–10. Note that all bit positions in the table that are blank represent “don’t care” bits for that particular option, which can be set to a value of 0 or 1.

Flush Mode (Buffer Flushing)Flush Mode options entered in hexadecimal format control line handling and network buffers with connection startup and disconnect. Two different packing algorithms are available.

FlushMode (00) ? _

Flush Mode options are listed in Table 6–11. Note that all bit positions in the table that are blank represent “don’t care” bits for that particular option, which can be set to a value of 0 or 1.

Pack ControlPack Control settings are enabled in Flush Mode. Set this value to 00 if you do not need specific functions.

Table 6–10 Disconnect Mode options

Disconnect Mode Option 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Disconnect when Modem Control In is not asserteda

a. When Modem Control In transitions from a high state to a low state, the network connection to or from the serial port drops.

1

Ignore Modem Control In 0

Telnet Com Port Cntrl and terminal type setupb

b. The Telnet Com Port Control feature is used in conjunction with Com Port Redirector. The unit sends the Terminal Type upon an outgoing connection.

1

Channel (port) passwordc

c. A password is required for a connection to the serial port from the network.

1

Hard disconnectd

d. The TCP connection closes even if the remote site does not acknowledge the discon-nection.

0

Disable hard disconnect 1

State LED off with connectione

e. When there is a network connection to or from the serial port, the State LED turns off instead of blinking.

1

Disconnect with EOT (^D)f

f. When Ctrl+D or Hex 04 is detected, the connection is dropped. Both Telnet Com Port Cntrl and Disconnect with EOT must be enabled for Disconnect with EOT to function properly. Ctrl+D is only detected going from the serial port to the network.

1

6–14 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13


The packing algorithms define how and when packets are sent to the network. The standard algorithm is optimized for applications in which the unit is used in a local environment, allowing for very small delays for single characters, while keeping the packet count low. The alternate packing algorithm minimizes the packet count on the network and is especially useful in applications in a routed Wide Area Network (WAN). Adjusting parameters in this mode can economize the network data stream.

Pack Control options are listed in Table 6–12. Note that all bit positions in the table that are blank represent “don’t care” bits for that particular option, which can be set to a value of 0 or 1.

Packing Interval

Packing Interval defines how long the unit should wait before sending accumulated characters. This wait period is between successive network segments containing data. For alternate packing, the default interval is 12 msec.

Trailing Characters

In some applications, CRC, Checksum, or other trailing characters follow the end-of-sequence character; this option helps to adapt frame transmission to the frame boundary.

Table 6–11 Flush Mode options

Flush Mode Option 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Input Buffer (Serial to Network)

Clear with a connection initiated from the device to the network

1

Clear with a connection initiated from the network to the device

1

Clear when the network connection to or from the device is disconnected

1

Output Buffer (Network to Serial)

Clear with a connection initiated from the device to the network

1

Clear with a connection initiated from the network to the device

1

Clear when the network connection to or from the device is disconnected

1

Alternate Packing Algorithm (Pack Control)

Enable 1



Send Characters

If 2-Byte Send Character Sequence is enabled, the unit interprets the send characters as a 2-byte sequence; if this option is not enabled, the unit interprets them independently.

If Send Immediately After Characters is not set, any characters already in the serial buffer are included in the transmission after a “transmit” condition is found. If this option is set, the unit sends immediately after recognizing the transmit condition (sendchar or timeout).

DisConnTime (Inactivity Timeout)Sets the inactivity timeout. The unit drops the connection if there is no activity on the serial line before the set time expires. Enter time in the format mm:ss, where “m” is the number of minutes and “s” is the number of seconds.

DisConnTime (00:00) ? _

To disable the inactivity timeout, enter 00:00. Range is 0 (disabled) to 5999 seconds (99 minutes, 59 seconds). The default is 0.

Table 6–12 Pack Control options

Flush Mode Option 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Packing Interval

Interval=12 msec 0 0



Interval=5 sec 1 1

Trailing Characters

None 0 0

One 0 1

Two 1 0

Send Characters

2-Byte Send Character Sequence 1

Send Immediately After Characters 1

A transmission might occur if status information needs to be exchanged or an acknowledgment needs to be sent.

6–16 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13


Send CharactersEnter up to two characters in hexadecimal representation.

SendChar 1 (00) ? _SendChar 2 (00) ? _

If the unit receives a character on the serial line that matches one of these characters, it sends the character immediately, along with any awaiting characters, to the TCP connection. This action minimizes the response time for specific protocol characters on the serial line (for example, ETX, EOT). Setting the first sendchar to 00 disables the recognition of the characters.

Alternatively, the unit can interpret two characters as a sequence (see “Pack Control” on page 6-14).

Telnet Terminal TypeThis parameter displays only if the terminal type option in Disconnect Mode is enabled. With the terminal type option enabled, the terminal name for the Data terminal type can be used. Enter only one name.

With terminal type option enabled, the unit also reacts to the EOR (end of record) and binary options, useful for applications like terminal emulation to IBM hosts.

Channel (Port) PasswordThis parameter displays only if the channel (port) password option is enabled in Disconnect Mode. With the channel (port) password option enabled, a password can be set on the serial port.

Expert Settings (Option 5)

TCP Keepalive time in secondsThis option allows you to change how many seconds the unit waits during a silent connection before attempting to see if the currently connected network device is still on the network. If the unit gets no response, it drops that connection.

TCP Keepalive time in s (1s – 65s; 0s=disable): (45)? _

Only an expert familiar with the consequences the changes might have should change these parameters.



ARP Cache timeout in secondsWhenever the unit communicates with another device on the network, it adds an entry into its ARP table. The ARP Cache timeout option allows you to define how many seconds (1-600) the unit will wait before timing out this table.

ARP Cache timeout in s (1s – 65s; 0s=disable): (600)? _

Disable Monitor Mode at bootupThis option allows you to disable all entries into Monitor Mode during startup, except for the ‘xxx’ sequence. This prevents entry using yyy, zzz, xx1, and yy1 key sequences (only during the bootup sequence). The default for Monitor Mode at bootup is N (No) (see “Monitor Mode” on page 6-21).

Disable Monitor Mode @ bootup (N) ? _

MTU SizeThe Maximum Transmission Unit (MTU) is the largest physical packet size a network can transmit for TCP and UDP. Enter between 512 and 1400 bytes. The default is 1400 bytes.

MTU Size: (1400) ? _

Enable alternate MACIf necessary, enable the alternate MAC address (if specified in the OEM setup record).

Enable alternate MAC (N) ? _

Ethernet connection typeThe XPort Direct allows for the Ethernet speed and duplex to be manually configured. Enter 0 for auto-negotiation (default). To select the speed and duplex, enter one of the following: 2 (10Mbit/half duplex), 3 (10Mbit/full duplex), 4 (100Mbit/half duplex), or 5 (100Mbit/full duplex).

Ethernet connection type: (0) ? _

Manually configured speed/duplex settings only work correctly if the peer or switch also uses a static setting. If the peer is set for auto negotiation, it will not necessarily result in the correct mode. This is a common Ethernet problem and is not specific to the analyzer.

6–18 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13


Security Settings (Option 6)Security settings can be changed by means of data or serial connections. SpectraSensors recommends setting security over the dedicated network or over the serial setup to prevent eavesdropping.

Disable Telnet SetupThis setting defaults to the N (No) option. The Y (Yes) option disables access to Setup Mode by Telnet (port 9999). It only allows access locally using the serial port of the unit.

Disable Telnet Setup (N) ? _

Disable TFTP Firmware UpgradeThis setting defaults to the N (No) option. The Y (Yes) option disables the use of TFTP to perform network firmware upgrades.

Disable TFTP Firmware Update (N) : _

Disable Port 77FE (Hex)

Port 77FE is a setting that allows custom programs to configure the unit remotely. It may be desirable to disable this capability for security purposes.

Disable Port 77FEh (N) ? _

The default setting is N (No), which enables remote configuration.

Disable ECHO PortsThis setting controls whether port 7 echoes characters it receives.

Disable ECHO ports (Y) ? _

Enable Enhanced PasswordThis setting defaults to the N (No) option, which allows a four-character password to be set that protects Setup Mode by means of Telnet. The Y (Yes)

Disabling both Telnet Setup and Port 77FE will prevent users from accessing the setup menu from the network.

Disabling both Telnet Setup and Port 77FE will prevent users from accessing the setup menu from the network.



option allows an extended security password of 16 characters to be set for protecting Telnet access.

Enable Enhanced Password (Y) ? _

Disable Port 77F0 (Hex)Port 77F0 allows a custom application to query or set the XPort Direct's configurable pins when they are functioning as general purpose I/O (GPIO). Disable this capability, if desired, for security purposes.

Disable Port 77F0h ? _

The default setting, the N (No) option, enables GPIO control. The Y (Yes) option disables the GPIO control interface.

Default Settings (Option 7)Resets the unit’s Channel 1 configuration and expert settings to the default settings. The server configuration settings for IP address, gateway IP address, and netmask remain unchanged. The specific settings that this option changes are listed in Table 6–13.

Table 6–13 Default settings

Parameter Default Setting

Channel 1 Configuration

Baudrate 9600

I/F Mode 4C (1 stop bit, no parity, 8 bit, RS-232C)

Port Number 10001

Connect Mode C0 (always accept incoming connection; no active connection startup)

Send '+++' in Modem Mode Enabled

Show IP addr after 'RING' Enabled

Hostlist retry counter 3

Hostlist retry timeout 250 (msec)

Start character for serial channel 1 0x0D (CR)

All other parameters 0

Expert Settings

TCP Keepalive time in s 45

ARP Cache timeout in s 600

Disable Monitor Mode @ bootup No

6–20 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13


Monitor ModeMonitor Mode is a command line interface used for diagnostic purposes. Monitor Mode can be accessed using a Telnet connection to configure the port locally or over the network.

To enter Monitor Mode:1. On your Windows desktop, click Start followed by Run (usually


2. Type the following command: telnet 192.168.0.1 9999.

3. Click OK to establish a Telnet connection. The following message appears:

MAC address 00204A808BE8Software version V6.3.0.3RC3 (061110)

Press Enter for Setup Mode

4. To enter Monitor Mode, type M (upper case) and press Enter. A 0> prompt indicates that you have successfully entered Monitor Mode.

Monitor Mode CommandsThe commands available in Monitor Mode are listed in Table 6–14. Many commands have an IP address as an optional parameter (xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx). By

Table 6-13 Default settings (Continued)

Parameter Default Setting

Expert Settings (Continued)

MTU Size (512 – 1400) 0 (resulting in an operational value of 1400)

Alternate MAC Disabled (for OEM use only)

Ethernet Connection Type 0 (auto-negotiate)

Security Settings

Disable Telnet setup No

Disable TFTP Firmware Update No

Disable Port 77FEh No

Disable ECHO ports Yes

Enable Enhanced password No

Disable Port 77F0h No



entering an IP address, the command will be applied to the unit with that IP address, otherwise, the command is executed locally.

Entering any of the commands listed in Table 6–14 generates one of the command response codes listed in Table 6–15.

Table 6–14 Monitor Mode commands

Command Function

VS x.x.x.x Queries software header record (16 bytes) of unit with IP address x.x.x.x.

GC x.x.x.xx Gets configuration of unit with IP address x.x.x.x as hex records (120 bytes).

SC x.x.x.x Sets configuration of unit with IP address x.x.x.x from hex records.

PI x.x.x.x Pings unit with IP address x.x.x.x to check device status.

AT Shows the unit’s ARP table entries.

TT Shows all incoming and outgoing TCP connections.

NC Shows the unit’s IP configuration.

RS Resets the unit’s power.

QU Exits diagnostics mode.

G0, G1, ....,Ge, Gf Gets a memory page of configuration information from the device.

S0, S1,...,Se, Sf Sets a memory page of configuration information on the device.

GM Shows the unit's 6-byte MAC address.

SS Sets the security record without the encryption key and length parameters. The entire record must still be written, but the encryption-specific bytes do not need to be provided (they can be null since they are not overwritten).

SA Initiates a wireless scan if the wireless interface is enabled. Reports any stations found, including BSSID, SSID, and RSSI. If SA is followed by a string, the string is used to filter SSIDs before reporting. If the BSS does not broadcast its SSID, only the BSSID and RSSI are returned.

NS Reports the network interfaces’ statuses. Includes potentially negotiated parameters like speed/duplex for Ethernet or encryp-tion, or BSSID and authentication for wireless interfaces.

Responses to some of the commands are in Intel Hex format.

6–22 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13


Table 6–15 Command response codes

Response Meaning

0> OK; no error

1> No answer from remote device

2> Cannot reach remote device or no answer

8> Wrong parameter(s)

9> Invalid command




6–24 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

7 - OPERATING THE H2O ANALYZER

Firmware VersionEach analyzer in a 2-Pack analyzer system operates on its own version of firmware. The firmware version for each analyzer is listed in the system calibration report. This chapter for system operation assumes the use of version v2.50 firmware.

Powering Up the AnalyzerAfter mounting the analyzer, connecting the power wires, connecting the gas lines, connecting the (optional) output signal wires, checking for leaks, and starting up the SCS following the procedure outlined in “Starting up the SCS” on page 3-3, you are ready to power up the analyzer.

To power up the analyzer:1. Power up the analyzer by energizing the circuit to the analyzer.

The analyzer is designed to be a stationary measuring device. It should be securely mounted during normal operation.

The laser housing labels on the flanges of the sample cell warn about exposure to laser radiation inside. Never open the sample cell unless directed to do so by a service representative and the analyzer power is turned off.

The optical head has a seal and “WARNING” sticker to prevent inadvertent tampering with the device. Do not attempt to compromise the seal of the optical head assembly. Doing so will result in loss of device sensitivity and inaccurate measurement data. Repairs can then only be performed by the factory and are not covered under warranty.

See Figure 2–4 or Figure 2–5 for locating fuses. If you need to replace a fuse, use only the same type and rating of fuse as the original, as listed in Table 2–2.

!

V A



2. The analyzer goes through an initialization period counting down from 14 while showing the firmware version and release date.

3. After initialization the LCD displays the Normal Mode screen with four lines (the third of which is blank for single-channel units).

4. Enable Peak Tracking following the procedure outlined in “To change parameters in Mode 2” on page 7-9.

5. Continuous updates of the measurement parameters displaying on the LCD indicate that the analyzer is operating normally.

Powering Down the AnalyzerIt may be necessary to power down the analyzer for problem solving or maintenance reasons. An approved switch or circuit breaker rated for 15 amps should have been installed and clearly marked as the disconnecting device for the analyzer.

To power down the analyzer:1. Switch off the power to the analyzer using the switch or circuit

breaker designated as the disconnection device for the equipment.

2. If the analyzer is going to be shut down for a short period of time for routine maintenance, isolate the analyzer from the SCS by following the procedure under “To isolate the SCS for short-term shutdown” on page 3-7.

3. If the analyzer is going to be shut down for a long period of time, follow the procedure under “To isolate the process sample tap for long-term shutdown” on page 3-8. It is recommended to also disconnect the power completely from the analyzer to prevent potential damage from lightning strikes.

Initializing...

14HC12 v2.50-xxxx

<NORMAL MODE>H2O: 1.0256ppmv

P: 954.4mb T: 76.1F

7–2 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

Operating the H2O Analyzer

Operating the Analyzer from the KeypadThe keypad enables the operator to modify measurement units, adjust operational parameters and perform diagnostics. During normal operation, the LCD continuously displays the measured components’ concentrations, sample cell temperatures, and sample cell pressures.

The SpectraSensors keypad is shown in Figure 7–1. To activate any functions on the keypad, press the mode key # followed by a number on the keypad to specify a mode.

When you press the # key, the word MODE displays on the LCD. At this point, the analyzer waits for you to press a second key.

Mode 2 sets the parameters in the system. In this mode, the * key functions as the “enter” key. The analyzer saves the displayed parameter value when you press this key. Always press * after entering a value on the keypad (unless the entry was made in error).

If you do make an error, press the # key followed by the 1 key to return to Mode 1 without saving.

You must press the # key before pressing a number or function key to trigger a response from the keypad.

Figure 7–1 H2O analyzer keypad (v2.50 Firmware)



Modes DefinedUse the keypad to access the following modes by pressing the key # key first followed by a number (1, 2, 4, 6 or 7) to activate a mode. The following section explains each mode and the corresponding information that displays on the LCD.

Mode 1: (Normal Display)Mode 1 continuously displays updated measurements. Press the # key followed by the 1 key.


• H2O: Concentration of analyte/component in the sample cell (in units) that is selected in Mode 2.


• T: Temperature in the sample cell in units selected in Mode 2.

Mode 2: (Change Parameters)Mode 2 enables the user to view and change measurement parameters. Press the # key followed by the 2 key.

The LCD prompts for a numeric password. Enter the user password (3142) on the keypad, then press the * key to enter the number. The following is displayed on the LCD.

+# 1

<NORMAL MODE>H2O: 1.0256ppmv

P: 954.4mb T: 76.1F

+# 2

<SET PARAMETER MODE>Enter password

HC12 v2.50-xxxx

7–4 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13


Follow the procedure under “To change parameters in Mode 2” on page 7-9 for viewing and changing any of the parameters.

Mode 3: (Not Used)

Mode 4: (Diagnostic Parameters)Mode 4 displays system diagnostic data. These values may be useful when troubleshooting the system. Press the # key followed by the 4 key.

Mode 5: (Not Used)

Mode 6: (Export Diagnostic Data)Used to transfer diagnostic data to the serial port and read the individual data points of both the DC and 2f spectra that the instrument analyzes to calculate the gas concentration. Viewing these data can be helpful in diagnosing problems with the analyzer. Press # key followed by the 6 key.

The data points, along with intermediate calculation results, are output to the serial port(s) whenever Mode 6 is selected.

<SET PARAMETER MODE>Main Matrix00:A 1:B 2:C 3:D

+# 4

PP2F:8190 PkDf:34.00Powr:2538 PkD1:34.00Indx: 301Zero: -24

+# 6



Mode 7: (Validation Measurements)Mode 7 is used to set the system for validation measurement. The settings for this mode are controlled by the Validation Matrix parameter. Press the # key followed by the 7 key.

While the system is in validation mode, (V) will display to the right of the analyte type on the LCD. Refer to “Validating the Analyzer” on page 7-21 for instructions on performing a manual validation measurement.

Mode 8: (Not Used)

Mode TEST: (System Test)Provides basic diagnostic test results indicating that the laser power, pressure/temperature sensors, and the infrared spectrum that the system records for analysis are all nominal. Press the # key followed by the TEST key.

The LCD displays the system test data.

For viewing the data, press the 1 key followed by the * key.

+# 7

<NORMAL MODE>H2O: 4.0256ppmv (V)

P: 954.4mb T: 76.1F

+# TEST

<SYSTEM TEST>Laser Power: OKPT Sen: OK Trak: OKSpectr: OK Null: OK

<H2O SYSTEM TEST>Laser Power: OKPT Sen: OK Trak: OKSpectr: OK Null: OK

7–6 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13


Changing Measurement and Control ParametersIn Mode 2, all of the pertinent measurement and control parameters can be viewed and changed. Refer to Table 7–1 for a list of parameters and value ranges. The parameters are listed in the order viewed during Mode 2 operation.

Table 7–1 Measurement and control parameters [H2O analyzer]


Main Matrix 0, 1, 2, 3 Sets the calibration matrix (A, B, C, D) that is used when Mode 1 is pressed

Validation Matrix 0, 1, 2, 3 Sets the calibration matrix (A, B, C, D) that is used when Mode 7 (H2O) or Mode 8 (H2O) is pressed

S Factor User Set-99 – 99Default = 1

Analyzer response adjustment to match calibration standard in the field.

S Factor Offset User Set-999999 – 999999Default = 0

Analyzer offset adjustment to match calibration standard in the field.

# Spectrum Average 1 – 240Default = 4

Sets the number of scans averaged for each measurement

Logger Rate 1 – 300 readingsDefault = 4

Sets the number of measurements to include in a running average

Peak Tracking 0, 1, 2 Sets peak tracking capability to off, on, or reset

DO Alarm Delay User Set0 – 30000Default = 0

Sets the number of consecutive readings concentration must be above setpoint before triggering a High Concentration Alarm

Low Power Warning User Set200 – 4999Default = 200

Sets the DC power level below which the analyzer will issue a Low Power Warning

DO Alarm Setup 0 – 8 or 100 – 108 Sets the functionality of the second-ary digital output (if applicable)

Alarm Setpoint 0 – 999999 Sets the threshold for the High (or Low) Concentration Alarm

4-20 mA Alarm Action 0, 1, 2 or 3 Sets the current loop state upon alarm condition



Table 7-1 Measurement and control parameters [H2O analyzer] (Continued)


4-20 mA % Test 0 – 101 Sets the 4-20 mA output to a per-centage of full scale

4 mA Value 0 – 999999 Sets the ppmv value that will corre-spond to 4 mA

20 mA Value 0 – 999999 Sets the ppmv value that will corre-spond to 20 mA

Temperature Unit 0 or 1 Sets the display unit for tempera-ture

Pressure Unit 0, 1, 2, or 3 Sets the display unit for pressure

Concentration Unit 0, 1 or 2 Sets the display unit for concentra-tion

Concen Unit Convert 0-999999 Sets a custom conversion multi-plier for the Concentration Unit. Zero uses the default conversion.

Pipeline Pressure 0 – 999999 Sets pipeline pressure used to cal-culate dew point

4-20 mA Value Action 0 or 1 Sets the behavior of the analog out-put when the analyzer is in Valida-tion Measurement Mode.

Modbus Address User Set0 – 250

Sets Modbus address for the ana-lyzer

Modbus Mode User Set0, 1, or 2

Sets type of Modbus protocol

Analyzer ID User Set0 – 2147483647

Customer definable value for ana-lyzer ID

Sample ID User Set0 – 2147483647

Customer definable value for sam-ple ID

Component ID User Set0 – 2147483647

Customer definable value for com-ponent (analyte) ID

User Password 0 – 9999Default = 3142

Sets Level 1 access password

7–8 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13


To change parameters in Mode 2:1. Press the # key followed by the 2 (Mode 2) key.

The LCD prompts for a numeric password.

2. Enter the user password (3142) on the keypad, then press the * key to enter the number. The following displays on the LCD.

3. Starting with the first parameter, enter a new value and/or press the * key to store the value and cycle to the next parameter.

4. When finished changing or viewing the measurement and control parameters, press the # key followed by the 1 key to return to Mode 1 and normal operation.

Measurement and Control Parameters DefinedThe following section defines the measurement and control parameters set in the system. The parameters are shown in alphabetical order for easy reference. Refer to Table 7–1 on page 7–7 to review the parameter order listed during Mode 2 configuration.

# Spectrum AverageThe # Spectrum Average parameter sets the number of scans that the analyzer averages when determining concentration. Averaging over multiple scans lowers noise in the measurement, but inherently increases response time. Each scan adds about 0.25 seconds to the response time. For example, if # Spectrum Average is set to “4,” an updated concentration value will be calculated about once every second.


HC12 v2.50-xxxx


<SET PARAMETER MODE># Spectrum Average16Enter a value



4-20 mA Alarm ActionThe 4-20 mA Alarm Action parameter determines the current loop state upon an alarm condition. Enter 0 (low) for the current loop to assume a low state (4 mA), 1 (high) for the current loop to assume a high state (20 mA), 2 (track and hold) for the current loop to hold the last valid measurement value, or 3 (no control) for the current loop to continue to track the concentration value upon an alarm condition.

4-20 mA % Test The 4-20 mA % Test parameter enables control of the current loop output for testing and calibration purposes. The value entered represents a percent of scale value where zero equals 4 mA and full scale equals 20 mA. Thus, the current loop output, i, is given by

,

where R is the 4-20 mA % Test parameter value. Entering 101 turns off the control of the current loop and returns to the current loop output tracking the concentration value.

After setting the desired value, press # Mode and 1 to initiate control of the current loop to the value entered.

4-20 mA Val ActionThe 4-20 mA Val Action parameter sets the behavior of the analog output signal while the analyzer is in Validation Measurement Mode. If 0 is chosen, the analog output will stay at the last known value while the analyzer is in

<SET PARAMETER MODE>4-20 mA Alarm Action00:L 1:H 2:T&H 3:None

i R= 20 mA 4 mA–( ) 4 mA+

<SET PARAMETER MODE>4-20 mA % Test101Enter a % (101=Off)

7–10 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13


Validation Measurement Mode. If 1 is chosen, the analyzer will update the analog output with the Validation Measurement Mode values.

4 mA ValueThe 4 mA Value parameter sets the concentration value [in ppmv or dew-point temperature (in temperature units selected with the Temperature Unit parameter)] that corresponds to 4 mA on the current loop output. Typically this will be 0.000.

20 mA ValueThe 20 mA Value parameter sets the concentration value [in ppmv or dew point temperature units selected with the Temperature Unit parameter)] that corresponds to 20 mA on the current loop output. Typically this will be the full-scale value for which the analyzer was calibrated.

Analyzer IDThe Analyzer ID parameter assigns a numeric identification to the data enabling SCADA or DCS systems to associate data with a particular analyzer.

<SET PARAMETER MODE>4-20mA Val Action00:Hold 1:Measure

<SET PARAMETER MODE>4 mA Value0.00000ppmv or DewPoint F/C

<SET PARAMETER MODE>20 mA Value100.000ppmv or DewPoint F/C

<SET PARAMETER MODE>Analyzer ID0Enter a value



Component ID

The Component ID parameter assigns a numeric identification to the data enabling SCADA or DCS systems to associate the data with a particular analyte/component.

Concen Unit ConvertThe Concen Unit Convert parameter allows a custom conversion multiplier to be used instead of the analyzer default conversion for the Concentration Unit. On moisture system, this custom conversion does not apply if dew point is chosen as the Concentration Unit.

Concentration UnitThe Concentration Unit parameter designates the display units for the measured concentration. For percentage level analyzers (non-H2O):

• 0 for ppmv

• 1 for %

• 2 for mg/sm3

<SET PARAMETER MODE>Component ID0Enter a value

<SET PARAMETER MODE>Concen Unit Convert0.0000:Off >0:Multiplier

<SET PARAMETER MODE>Concentration Unit00:ppm 1:lb 2:DP 3:mg

7–12 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13


DO Alarm DelayThe DO Alarm Delay parameter sets the number of measurements to delay the high concentration alarm before it becomes active.

DO Alarm SetupThe DO Alarm Setup parameter sets the functionality of the secondary digital output.

Enter the value corresponding to the desired functionality according to Table 7–2.

Table 7–2 Secondary digital output functionality

Setting Functionality

No

rmall

y E

nerg

ized

0 Always Activated

1 High Concentration Alarm

2 Low Concentration Alarm

3 Power Fail Error

4 PT Fail Error

5 Spectrum Fail Error

6 Null Fail Error

7 Track Fail Error

8 Power Warning

<SET PARAMETER MODE>DO Alarm Delay4Enter a value

<SET PARAMETER MODE>DO Alarm Setup1Enter a value



Table 7-2 Secondary digital output functionality (Continued)

Logger RateFor applications where an external data logger is employed, use the logging rate to set the number of measurements to include in the running average. The display and the current loop output will each have a value representing the running average of the concentration over a number of measurements equal to Logger Rate.

Setting Functionality

No

rmall

y D

een

erg

ized

100 Always Deactivated

101 High Concentration Alarm

102 Low Concentration Alarm

103 Power Fail Error

104 PT Fail Error

105 Spectrum Fail Error

106 Null Fail Error

107 Track Fail Error

108 Power Warning

Option 0 is intended to be used as a power failure alarm for the analyzer for AC or DC power only. If selected while the analyzer is on, the relay will also be on. If the analyzer loses power, the relay will turn off.

<SET PARAMETER MODE>Logger Rate4Enter a value

7–14 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13


Low Power WarningThe Low Power Warning parameter sets the level at which the analyzer will issue a Low Power Warning.

Main MatrixOn some systems, more than one calibration is needed to handle multiple analyte ranges or background variations. Up to four calibrations matrices can be loaded into the analyzer each using a letter designation (A, B, C or D). The Main Matrix parameter sets the active calibration matrix when Mode 1 is pressed.

Modbus AddressThe Modbus Address parameter sets the analyzer address for when the analyzer is used as a Modbus device. Addresses from 1 to 250 can be used.

Modbus ModeThe Modbus Mode parameter sets the communications protocol for the RS-232 port. There are three choices: 0 for turning the Modbus capabilities off and defaulting to generic serial output as described in “Receiving Serial Data (Customer Port Output)” on page 8-1; 1 for enabling the analyzer to

<SET PARAMETER MODE>Low Power Warning200Enter a value


<SET PARAMETER MODE>Modbus Address1Enter a value(1-250)



respond to Gould Modbus RTU function codes 3, 6 and 16; and 2 for enabling the analyzer to respond to Daniel Modbus RTU function codes 3, 6 and 16.

Peak Tracking

The peak tracking function is a software utility that continuously adjusts the laser current to keep the absorption peak of the measured component at the center of the scan. There are three choices: 0 for no peak tracking, 1 for peak tracking (default), or 2 to reset the peak tracking function. In most cases, the peak tracking should be left on (i.e., Peak Tracking set to 1).

Pressure UnitThe Pressure Unit parameter designates the display units for the measured absolute pressure in the cell. There are four choices: 0 for millibar, 1 for Torr, 2 for kPa, and 3 for psia.

Sample ID

The Sample ID parameter assigns a numeric identification to the data enabling SCADA or DCS systems to associate the data with a particular sample point.


<SET PARAMETER MODE>Peak Tracking10:Off 1:Track 2:Rst

<SET PARAMETER MODE>Pressure Unit

0:mb1:Torr2:Pa3:psi

<SET PARAMETER MODE>Sample ID0Enter a value

7–16 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13


S FactorThe S Factor parameter is a user definable value that enables adjustment (without affecting the factory calibration) of the analyzer response (or slope) in the field [see “Adjusting Analyzer Reading to Match Specific Standard(s)” on page 7-18].

S Factor OffsetThe S Factor Offset parameter is a user definable value that enables adjustment (without affecting the factory calibration) of the analyzer offset in the field [see “Adjusting Analyzer Reading to Match Specific Standard(s)” on page 7-18].

Temperature UnitThe Temperature Unit parameter designates the display units for the measured cell temperature. There are two choices: 0 for degrees Celsius and 1 for Fahrenheit. The default value is the standard unit of measurement in the region the analyzer is being used.

<SET PARAMETER MODE>S Factor1.00000Enter a value

<SET PARAMETER MODE>S Factor Offset0.00000Enter a value (ppmv)

<SET PARAMETER MODE>Temperature Unit00:C 1:F



User PasswordThe User Password parameter sets the Level 1 access password. The default password is 3142.

Validation MatrixOn some systems, more than one calibration is needed to handle multiple analyte ranges or background variations. Up to four calibrations matrices can be loaded into the analyzer each using a letter designation (A, B, C or D). The Validation Matrix parameter sets the active calibration matrix that is used when Mode 7 is pressed.

Adjusting Analyzer Reading to Match Specific Standard(s)In some instances, the user may wish to adjust the analyzer reading to match the concentration (or concentrations) of a specific standard (or standards). The S Factor and S Factor Offset parameters are used to adjust the analyzer output in the field without affecting the factory calibration. Both parameters are used when samples from two different concentration standards are available, whereas only the S Factor Offset parameter is used when a sample from only one concentration standard is available.

The value of the S Factor parameter, S, is determined by

,

where C1 is the certified concentration of standard No. 1, C2 is the certified concentration of standard No. 2, A1 is the measured concentration (analyzer reading) of standard No. 1, and A2 is the measured concentration (analyzer reading) of standard No. 2.

<SET PARAMETER MODE>User Password3142Enter password

<SET PARAMETER MODE>Validation Matrix00:A 1:B 2:C 3:D

SC2 C1–A2 A1–--------------------=

7–18 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13


The S Factor Offset parameter, O, is determined by

,

where when a sample from only one concentration standard is available.

To adjust the analyzer reading:1. Validate the analyzer using one or two concentration standards [see

“Validating the Analyzer” on page 7-21].

2. Calculate the S Factor and/or S Factor Offset parameter(s) using the equations above.

3. Follow the procedure under “To change parameters in Mode 2” on page 7-9 to enter the new values.

4. Confirm the new values by re-measuring the bottle(s) of test gas.

Scaling and Calibrating the Current Loop SignalThe 4-20 mA current loop signal is most conveniently scaled and calibrated at the receiving end (RTU, flow computer, etc.).

SpectraSensors recommends validating the analyzer using only the analyte/component mixed in the validation gas specified on the analyzer calibration report. Bottles of test gas with certified concentrations of approximately 20% and 80% of full scale are recommended for two point validation. For single point validation, a bottle with a certified concentration of approximately 50% of full scale should be used.


The 4-20 mA current loop is factory set as the source unless otherwise specified. Contact your sales representative if a change is required.

O C1 S A1⋅( )–=

S 1=



To scale the receiver’s output, the analyzer’s current loop output is set to 4 mA and 20 mA and the receiver is adjusted to read “0” and “Full Scale,” respectively.

To scale the current loop signal:1. Make sure the current loop to be adjusted is connected and the

receiver is set for the 4-20 mA board to source the current.

2. Set the current loop output to 4 mA by setting the 4-20 mA % Test parameter to zero (see “To change parameters in Mode 2” on page 7-9).

3. Adjust the receiver calibration control to read the appropriate value. The current loop output of 4 mA corresponds to the concentration value set by the 4 mA Value parameter.

4. Set the current loop output to 20 mA by setting the 4-20 mA % Test parameter to 100.

5. Adjust the receiver calibration control to read the appropriate value. The current loop output of 20 mA corresponds to the concentration value set by the 20 mA Value parameter.

6. If desired, repeat by setting the 4-20 mA % Test parameter, R, to any value between 0 and 100 and confirm that the output, i, agrees with .

7. When finished, reset the 4-20 mA % Test parameter to 101.

Warnings• Low Power Warning: This warning occurs when the DC signal

drops below the level set by the Low Power Warning parameter.

Faults/AlarmsThe High Concentration Alarm or Low Concentration Alarm is triggered when the measured concentration is above or below, respectively, the level set in Mode 2. The General Fault Alarm is triggered by system faults that also cause the current loop to respond according to the 4-20 mA Alarm Action setting. The particular fault is indicated by a message on the front panel LCD. System faults include one or more of the following:

• Power Fail Error: This fault occurs when the DC signal becomes too weak for a reliable measurement typically as a result of mirror contamination.

Be sure to work in a non-hazardous area while handling any electrical connector.

i R= 20 mA 4 mA–( ) 4 mA+

7–20 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13


• Null Fail Error: This fault occurs if the detector signal value is out of the range of -50 to +50 when the laser is turned off.

• Spectrum Fail Error: This fault occurs when the system is unable to adequately fit a curve to the measured signal, typically as a result of DC signal saturation in the absence of absorbing gas in the measurement cell, too much noise in the signal or an unexpected gas mixture in the measurement cell.

• PT Fail Error: This fault occurs when the pressure and/or temperature in the measurement cell exceeds the specified maximum operating levels.

• Track Fail Error: This fault occurs when the peak tracking function is out of range [PkDf (factory set midpoint) and PkD1 (peak track midpoint) differ by more than 4 counts].

Alarm and fault messages appear on the front panel LCD. See Appendix B for recommendations and solutions to common problems resulting in a system fault.

Validating the AnalyzerValidation of the analyzer using an appropriate gas standard can be done manually on systems equipped with a check gas or validation gas port.

To validate manually (if applicable):1. Connect a bottle of validation gas to the check gas or validation gas

port (at the specified supply pressure).

2. Press #(Mode) 7 to set the validation measurement mode.

3. Close the upstream measurement cell isolation valve.

4. Open the check gas or validation gas shut-off valve.

5. Adjust the sample flowmeter metering valve to the specified flow for the measurement cell.

When the validation mode is enabled through Mode 7, “(V)” will be displayed to the right of the designated analyte type on the LCD.

The adjustment setpoints of the analyzer flowmeters and pressure regulators will be interactive and may require readjustment multiple times until the final setpoints are obtained.



6. Make a measurement after the gas flows for approximately five minutes or when the values on the LCDs settle.

7. After validation, press #(Mode) 1 to return to normal mode.

8. Close the check gas or validation gas shut-off valve.

9. Open the upstream measurement cell isolation valve.

10. Adjust the sample flowmeter metering valve to the specified flow for the measurement cell, and to return to normal operation.

Calibrating the AnalyzerCalibrating the analyzer is typically not required under normal circumstances. SpectraSensors calibrates each analyzer to a National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) traceable standard before shipping the unit to the end user. Because SpectraSensors analyzers use a non-contact form of measurement, they are relatively insensitive to contamination, are quite rugged and virtually maintenance free ensuring years of reliable service.

The analyzer system has been designed for the sample flow rate specified. A lower than specified sample flow rate may adversely affect system performance. If you are unable to attain the specified sample flow rate, contact your factory sales representative.

SpectraSensors recommends validating the analyzer using only the analyte mixed in the validation gas specified on the analyzer calibration report. Bottles of test gas with certified concentrations of approximately 20% and 80% of full scale are recommended for two point validation. For single point validation, a bottle with a certified concentration of approximately 50% of full scale should be used.


7–22 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

8 - FIRMWARE V2.50 SERIAL PORT COMMUNICATIONS

Receiving Serial Data (Customer Port Output)When the Modbus Mode parameter is set to 0, the analyzer is configured to transfer a string of data from the analyzer to a serial device via the RS-232 output. The receiving device is typically a computer terminal running HyperTerminal, which is a program included with Microsoft® Windows® 95, 98, and XP that enables serial communication and the viewing, capturing and storage of serial port data and messages.

To launch HyperTerminal:1. On your Windows desktop, click Start followed by Run (usually


2. Type Hypertrm.exe and hit Return to launch HyperTerminal.

3. Once HyperTerminal is activated, the Connection Description window appears, as shown in Figure 8–1. Type in a Filename (where the terminal session settings will be stored for future recall) and click on any icon. Click OK.

4. The Connect To window appears prompting for a connection, as shown in Figure 8–2. Click the Menu Arrow under Connect Using to view the choices.

5. Click on the appropriate port to which your analyzer is connected (COM1, COM2, COM3, etc.) as established under “Connecting the Output Signals and Alarms” on page 2-15. Click OK.

6. Once the port is chosen, the COM Properties window appears. Make sure the COM properties for the port selected reflect those shown in Figure 8–3 (9600 baud, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, no parity, and no flow control).

7. Click OK to establish the connection.

Once connected, the data will start streaming through the Hyperterminal Window as shown in Figure 8–4.

For faster access to HyperTerminal, save a HyperTerminal shortcut to the desktop.



Figure 8–1 Connection Description window (v2.50)

Figure 8–2 Connect To window (v2.50)

8–2 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

Firmware v2.50 Serial Port Communications

Figure 8–3 COM Properties window (v2.50)

Figure 8–4 Hyperterminal window with streaming data (v2.50)



The data string is comma and space delimited with a carriage return and includes:

• Concentration: Analyte concentration (user selected units)

• Pressure: Cell pressure (user selected units)

• Temperature: Cell temperature (user selected units)

• PP2F: Magnitude of concentration signal (counts)

• Powr: DC signal at absorption peak (counts)

• Indx: Position of absorption peak in scan

• Zero: Detected signal with laser turned off (counts)

• PkD1: Present midpoint value (mA)

To capture and save data from the serial port:1. To save the data from the serial port, use the Transfer/Capture

Text function and enter the Filename to where you would like to store the captured data.

2. To stop the capture of the serial data, click on Transfer/Capture Text/Stop.

To read diagnostic data with HyperTerminal:1. Before entering Mode 6, make sure the serial port on the computer

used for serial communication is connected to the analyzer and the output stream is showing on the screen as described in “To launch HyperTerminal” on page 8-1.

2. To save the data from the serial port, use the Transfer/Capture Text function and enter the Filename to where you would like to store the captured data.

The number of seconds between each line of data output should be the # Spectrum Average number set in Mode 2 or Mode 3 divided by 4.

8–4 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13


3. Once capturing is in place, enter Mode 6 by pressing # key followed by the 6 key.

The index shown on the LCD display counts by 50’s from 0 to 511 in a few seconds. The analyzer will continue to dump Mode 6 data until instructed to stop. The screen above will repeat itself for each data dump. Once sufficient data has been captured, press the “MODE” key at any time to discontinue.

When the analyzer completes the current dump, the following screen displays:

4. Press the # key followed by the 1 key to return to Mode 1.

5. Once normal operation resumes, allow appropriate time for data streaming, then stop the capture of the serial data. To stop the capture of the serial data, click on Transfer/Capture Text/Stop. The resulting data files contain the downloaded data as shown in Figure 8–5.

To import the stored data file into a spreadsheet program such as Microsoft Excel® to plot the data, refer to “Viewing Diagnostic Data with Microsoft Excel” for instructions.

Viewing Diagnostic Data with Microsoft ExcelA spreadsheet program such as Microsoft Excel can import the data collected in the Mode 6 data dump for viewing and plotting.

To import the data file into Excel:1. In Excel, click Open and choose the name of the spectrum file saved

while in Mode 6. Be sure to select All Files (*.*) under Files of type: while searching, as shown in Figure 8–6.

+# 6


Index: 0

MODE



Figure 8–5 Sample Mode 6 data output (v2.50)

211.6678, 0.0000, 1006.9, 24.98, 2154, 2078, 340, -10, 60.00

211.1581, 0.0000, 1006.6, 24.98, 2137, 2078, 340, -9, 60.00210.6408, 0.0000, 1007.6, 24.98, 2128, 2078, 340, -10, 60.00

HC12 v2.50-B525 H2O Single

Current Mode: Main StreamCurrent File: 0 (0:A 1:B 2:C 3:D)

SettingsPhase: 300Midpoint: 60.0000Ramp amplitude: 35.0000Imod: 8.000Rcalb: (A)4.000000E+01 (B)4.000000E+01 (C)4.000000E+01 (D)4.000000E+01Zero Offset (ppmv): (A)0.000000E+00 (B)0.000000E+00 (C)0.000000E+00 (D)0.000000E+00Min Range (ppmv): 0.000Max Range (ppmv): 422.00Min Pressure (mbar): 700Max Pressure (mbar): 1700P a1 Coeff: (A)1.000E+00 (B)1.000E+00 (C)1.000E+00 (D)1.000E+00P a2 Coeff: (A)0.000E+00 (B)0.000E+00 (C)0.000E+00 (D)0.000E+00P a3 Coeff: (A)0.000E+00 (B)0.000E+00 (C)0.000E+00 (D)0.000E+00P a4 Coeff: (A)0.000E+00 (B)0.000E+00 (C)0.000E+00 (D)0.000E+00NL a0 Coeff: (A)0.00000E+00 (B)0.00000E+00 (C)0.00000E+00 (D)0.00000E+00NL a1 Coeff: (A)1.00000E+00 (B)1.00000E+00 (C)1.00000E+00 (D)1.00000E+00NL a2 Coeff: (A)0.00000E+00 (B)0.00000E+00 (C)0.00000E+00 (D)0.00000E+00NL a3 Coeff: (A)0.00000E+00 (B)0.00000E+00 (C)0.00000E+00 (D)0.00000E+00Xleftvmr: 240Xrightvmr: 340Null Fail Range Min: -50Null Fail Range Max: 50Peak Track Num Avgs: 3600Serial Number: 100000000Main Matrix: 0Validation Matrix: 0S Factor: 1.00000S Factor Offset: 0.00000# Spectrum Average: 4Logger Rate: 4Peak Tracking: 0DO Alarm Delay: 0Low Power Warning: 200DO Alarm Setup: 0Alarm Setpoint(ppmv): 430.04-20mA Alarm Action: 04-20mA % Test: 1014 mA Value: 0.00020 mA Value: 422.000Temperature Unit: 0Pressure Unit: 0Concentration Unit: 0Concen Unit Convert: 0.000Pipeline Pressure: 0.004-20 mA Val Action : 0

8–6 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13


Figure 8-5 Sample diagnostic data output [v2.50] (Continued)

Modbus Address: 1Modbus Mode: 0User Analyzer ID: 0User Sample ID: 0User Component ID: 0

Peak Index Location: 290mA Index Scale: 0.06835938Peak Track Range Min: 3Peak Track Range Max: 70

ConstantsNull Point: 6

SpectraSensors HardHatIdxDCAC0 3157 -325 1 2679 -269 2 1992 -264 3 1348 -254 4 844 -238 5 490 -218 6 263 -197 7 125 -176 8 49 -156 9 11 -138 10 -4 -120 11 -10 -104 12 -10 -90 13 10 -125 14 65 257 15 114 982 16 145 1573 17 156 1917 18 158 2325 19 156 2957 20 157 3604 21 161 4095 22 165 4095 23 171 4095 24 178 4095 25 184 4095 26 191 4095 27 197 4095 28 203 4095 29 208 4095 30 214 4095 31 219 4095 32 225 4095 33 229 4095 34 235 4095 35 239 4095 36 244 4095 37 250 4095 38 254 4095 39 260 4095 40 264 4095 41 270 4095 42 274 4095 43 278 4095



2. The Text Import Wizard should open. Choose the Delimited option and click Next, as shown in Figure 8–7.

3. Under Delimiters, choose the Tab and Comma options, check the Treat Consecutive Delimiters as One box, as shown in Figure 8–8, and then click Finish to display the spreadsheet.The first few lines look like the normal serial output data received

Figure 8–6 Opening a data file in Excel

Figure 8–7 Setting data type in Text Import Wizard

8–8 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13


before the Mode 6 command was entered. Look for the three columns of numbers, as shown in Figure 8–9.

4. Click on the upper left cell with the “Idx” header, as shown in Figure 8–9. Hold the Shift key down while pressing the Control key followed by the Right Arrow key to highlight all three columns in

Figure 8–8 Setting Tab and Comma as delimiters

Figure 8–9 Highlighting imported data for plotting in Excel



the row. Hold the Shift and Control key down again and press the Down Arrow key to highlight all 512 rows.

5. Click the Chart Wizard button on the Task Bar. The Chart Wizard opens, as shown in Figure 8–10.

6. Choose the X-Y (Scatter) chart type and the Smoothed Lines Without Markers sub-type. Click Finish to display a graph of the spectrum, as shown in Figure 8–11.

If the 2f curve appears flat, double click on it to get to the Format Data Series Window. Select the Axis tab, and select Plot Series

Figure 8–10 Chart Wizard - Step 1 window

-500

0

500

1000

1500

2000

2500

3000

0 200 400 600-150-100

-500

50100

150200

250

Series1Series2

Figure 8–11 Data file plot in Excel

8–10 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13


on Secondary Axis, as shown in Figure 8–12. Click OK to rescale the plot.

Modbus Communications ProtocolModbus is a serial communications protocol published by Modicon in 1979 for use with its programmable logic controllers (PLCs). It has become a de facto standard communications protocol in industry, and is now the most commonly available means of connecting industrial electronic devices. Modbus is used extensively in lieu of other communications protocols because it is openly published and royalty-free, relatively easy to deploy, and capable of moving raw bits or words without placing many restrictions on vendors.

Modbus enables communication between many devices connected to the same network, for example, a supervisory computer with a remote terminal unit (RTU) in supervisory control and data acquisition (SCADA) systems.

The SpectraSensors analyzer acts as a slave in a master/slave(s) network of devices. It can receive queries from a master and send responses back using either Gould Modbus RTU protocol or Daniel Extended Modbus RTU protocol.

Framing/ProtocolThe transmission mode used to communicate is either Gould Modbus RTU or Daniel Modbus RTU with port parameters 9600 (baud rate), 8 (data bits), 1 (stop bit), no (parity), and none (flow control/handshake).

Figure 8–12 Format Data Series window



The Modbus option is determined by the user via a front-panel configuration parameter as follows:

• Set Modbus Mode = 0 to disable Modbus mode and to enable the Generic Serial mode

• Set Modbus Mode = 1 to enable Gould Modbus RTU mode

• Set Modbus Mode = 2 to enable Daniel Modbus RTU mode

FunctionsAvailable functions are 0x03 (read holding registers), 0x06 (write to a single register), 0x10 (write to multiple registers), and 0x2B (read device identification).

AddressingThe analyzer's Modbus slave node address can be in the range of 0-250 with the default being 1. All analyzers will respond to an address of 0, so this address can be used to interrogate a single unit when its address is unknown or to determine its address.

See Table 8–1 on page 8–15 for register definitions for both Gould and Daniel Modbus modes. Be aware that for Gould Modbus the table follows the convention of identifying the register with an offset of 40001. Therefore, the actual value transmitted in the starting register field of the command is the listed register value minus 40001, e.g., register 47001 is addressed as 7000.

Reading/Writing in Daniel Modbus ModeDaniel Modbus supports three types of registers: short integer, long integer and floating point. Each “short integer” register is two bytes in length and will contain an integer value. Each “long integer” register is four bytes in length and will contain an integer value and each “floating point” register is four bytes in length and will contain a floating point value.

Reading/Writing in Gould Modbus ModeGould Modbus supports three types of variable data, short integer, long integer and floating point, but all registers are addressed as word (two byte) registers. A “short integer” value is contained in one register whereas a “long integer” or

The generic serial output (HyperTerminal) is disabled if either Gould or Daniel Modbus is selected.

8–12 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13


“floating point” value requires two contiguous registers. The registers are defined as Read or Read/Write.

An appropriate password must be downloaded to the password register prior to writing to most registers. The User Level 1 (L1) user password 3142 will allow access to those registers which have been pre-defined as user configurable. Other writable registers can only be downloaded or changed by SpectraSensors support personnel using a User Level 2 (L2) password.

EndiannessEndianness, often referred to as byte order, is the ordering of individually addressable sub-units (words, bytes, or even bits) within a longer data word. Byte orders with the most versus least significant byte first are called big-endian and little-endian, respectively. In SpectraSensors analyzers, all bytes are stores big-endian. Thus, for floating point and long-integer data types, the byte order will look like:

Note that floating point values follow the IEEE Standard for Floating-Point Arithmetic (IEEE 754-2008).

To enable Modbus communications:1. Confirm that the serial cable has been properly connected. See

“Connecting the Output Signals and Alarms” on page 2-15.

2. Power up the analyzer (see “Powering Up the Analyzer” on page 7-1).

3. Press the # key followed by the 3 key.

The LCD prompts for a numeric password. Enter the user password (3142) on the keypad and the following displays on the LCD.

Use caution when writing to registers as changing the value of a writable register may affect the calibration of the analyzer.

HighWord-HighByte HighWord-LowByte LowWord-HighByte LowWord-LowByte


HC12 v2.50-xxxx



Press the * key to enter the number to enter Mode 3 (Set Parameter Mode).

4. Press the * key repeatedly until the Modbus Address parameter is displayed.

5. Enter the desired Modbus Address and press the * key to store the value and cycle to the Modbus Mode parameter.

6. Enter the desired Modbus Mode and press the * key to store the value.

7. Press the # key followed by the 1 key to return to Mode 1.The analyzer is now ready to receive Modbus queries.


<SET PARAMETER MODE>Modbus Address1Enter a value(1-250)


8–14 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13


Table 8–1 Modbus register map [v2.50]


Gould Reg.

Data Type Action Min Max

Concentration 7001 47001 Float Read 0 0

Temperature 7002 47003 Float Read 0 0

Pressure 7003 47005 Float Read 0 0

Supply Voltage (DC) 7004 47007 Float Read 0 0

PkD1 (Current Midpoint) 7005 47009 Float Read 0 0

Firmware Version 7057 47113 Float Read 0 0

S Factor 7101 47201 Float R/W L1a -99 99

S Factor Offset (ppmv) 7102 47203 Float R/W L1a -999999 999999

Alarm Setpoint (ppmv, lb or %)

7103 47205 Float R/W L1 0 999999

Pipeline Pressure (mb) 7104 47207 Float R/W L1a 0 9999.9

4 mA Value (ppmv) 7105 47209 Float R/W L1a 0 999999

20 mA Value 7106 47211 Float R/W L1a 0 999999

Concen Unit Convert 7107 47213 Float R/W L1 0 999999

Alarm Flags 5001 45001 Long Read 0 0

Analyzer ID 5101 45201 Long R/W L1a 0 2.0E9

Sample ID 5102 45203 Long R/W L1a 0 2.0E9

Component ID 5103 45205 Long R/W L1a 0 2.0E9

PP2f 3001 43001 Integer Read 0 0

Power 3002 43002 Integer Read 0 0

Index 3003 43003 Integer Read 0 0

Zero 3004 43004 Integer Read 0 0

# Spectrum Average 3201 43201 Integer R/W L1a 1 240

Logger Rate 3202 43202 Integer R/W L1a 1 299

Peak Tracking 3203 43203 Integer R/W L1a 0 2

4-20 mA Alarm Action 3204 43204 Integer R/W L1a 0 3

Temperature Unit 3205 43205 Integer R/W L1a 0 1

Pressure Unit 3206 43206 Integer R/W L1a 0 3

Concentration Unit 3207 43207 Integer R/W L1a 0 2

Modbus Device Address 3208 43208 Integer R/W L1a 0 250

a. Write privilege requires User Level 1 (L1) password to be downloaded to the Pass-word register.



a. Write privilege requires User Level 1 (L1) password to be downloaded to the Pass-word register.

Modbus Accessible Parameter Definitions

• Concentration: Current live concentration in selected engineering units.

• Temperature: Current live temperature of the gas sample in selected engineering units.

• Pressure: Current live pressure reading of the gas sample in selected engineering units atmospheric.

• Supply Voltage: The current live supply voltage to the analyzer board.

• PkD1(Current Midpoint): The current midpoint value being used in the analyzer when peak tracking is turned on.

• Firmware Version: Firmware version running in the analyzer.

• S Factor: Slope adjustment enabling the analyzer to be tuned to match a specific calibration standard without affecting the factory calibration.

• S Factor Offset: Offset adjustment enabling the analyzer to be tuned to match a specific calibration standard without affecting the factory calibration.

• Alarm Setpoint: Triggers a digital output alarm when the concentration is lower than (exceeds) the set point. (Only for relay configured units)

Table 8-1 Modbus register map [v2.50] (Continued)


Gould Reg.

Data Type Action Min Max

Modbus Mode 3209 43209 Integer R/W L1a 0 2

DO Alarm Setup 3210 43210 Integer R/W L1a 0 108

4-20mA % Test 3211 43211 Integer R/W L1a 0 101

Low Power Warning 3212 43212 Integer R/W L1a 200 4999

User Password 3213 43213 Integer R/W L1a 0 9999

DO Alarm Delay 3214 43214 Integer R/W L1a 0 30000

Main Matrix 3215 43215 Integer R/W L1 0 3

Validation Matrix 3216 43216 Integer R/W L1 0 3

4-20 mA Val Action 3217 43217 Integer R/W L1 0 1

Password 4999 44999 Integer R/W L0 0 9999

8–16 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13


• Pipeline Pressure: Sets the pressure used in calculating dew point. The pressure unit is mb when setting this parameter via Modbus communications and as set by the Pressure Unit parameter when setting via the front panel.

• 4 mA Value (ppmv): Controls the low range of the 4-20 mA output.

• 20 mA Value (ppmv): Controls the high range of the 4-20 mA output.

• Concen Unit Convert: If set to 0, the default conversion factor for Concentration Unit is used, but if set to a value, this will be the value used for the conversion factor (multiplier) that is used.

• Alarm Flags: Long integer register identifying the status of each individual alarm in the analyzer as follows:

Bit 0 = 1, general fault condition existsBit 1 = 1, Null Fail Error condition existsBit 2 = 1, Spectrum Fail Error condition existsBit 3 = 1, PT Fail condition existsBit 4 = 1, Power Fail Error condition existsBit 5 = 1, Track Fail Error condition existsBit 6 = 1, Concentration is over user defined limitBit 7 = 1, Power Warning condition exists

• Analyzer ID: User defined numeric analyzer ID.

• Sample ID: User defined numeric sample ID.

• Component ID: User defined numeric component ID.

• PP2F (counts): Value of the concentration signal.

• Power (counts): Laser power detected at the absorption peak.

• Indx: Position of the absorption peak along scan.

• Zero (counts): Detected signal level with laser off.

• # Spectrum Average: Number of scans averaged for each measurement.

• Logger Rate: Running average of the concentration reading.

• Peak Tracking: Turns peak tracking on and off.

• 4-20 mA Alarm Action: Sets 4-20 mA signal reaction to alarm condition.

• Temperature Unit: Sets the temperature measurement units.

• Pressure Unit: Sets the pressure measurement units.

• Concentration Unit: Sets the concentration measurement units.

• Modbus Address: User assigned numeric address identifying analyzer to Modbus host system.



• Modbus Mode: Sets the Modbus communication protocol type.

• DO Alarm Setup: Sets function of the secondary digital output.

• 4-20 mA % Test: User set relative output of 4-20 mA current loop.

• Low Power Warning: Sets the level at which the analyzer will issue a Low Power Warning.

• DO Alarm Delay: Sets the number of consecutive readings concentration must be above setpoint before triggering a High Concentration Alarm.

• Main Matrix: Picks the current calibration matrix that is used when Mode 1 is pressed and when parameters are changed. Up to four calibrations can be saved.

• Validation Matrix: Picks the current calibration matrix that is used when Mode 7 (Ch A) or Mode 8 (Ch B) is pressed.

• 4-20 mA Val Action: When Mode 7 (Ch A) or Mode 8 (Ch B) is pressed, the analyzer will either hold the last known value for the analog output or update the analog output with the validation measurements.

• Password: Password required to change register settings. In the above table those registers denoted as R/W L1 can be modified if the User Level 1 password is downloaded to this register.

• User Password: Sets Level 1 password.

8–18 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

Appendix A: Specifications Table A–1 Analyzer specifications

Performance

Concentration a

a. Consult factory for alternative ranges.

Refer to calibration report

Repeatability Refer to calibration report

Measurement Update Time b

b. Total system response is dependant on flow rate and sample system volume.

H2S: <5 secondsH2O: 1 second

Periodic Scrubber Cycle Duration 90 seconds

Application Data

Environmental Temperature Range/Sample Cell Temperature Range

–4° to 122° F (–20° C to 50° C) - Standard-5° to 140 °F (-15° to 60° C) - Optional

Heated SCS Enclosure Temperature 50±1 °C

Environmental Relative Humidity 80% for temperatures up to 31 °C max

Altitude Up to 4000 m

Sample Inlet Pressure 1.5-4 barG (20-50 PSIG) to enclosure inlet

Cell Pressure Range800-1200 mbar - Standard950-1700 mbar - Optional

Sample Flow RateH2S: 4 l/min. (8 scfh)H2O: 1 l/min. (2 scfh)

Recommended ValidationH2S: Binary cal gas bottleH2O: Bureau of Mines Chilled Mirror, portable TDL or binary cal gas

Electrical & Communications

Input Voltagec

c. Supply voltage not to exceed ±10% of nominal. Transient over-voltages according to Over VoltageCategory II.

100–240 VAC, 50/60 Hz single phase - Standard18–24 VDC - Optional, electronics only

Current (analyzer) 3A max @ 120 VAC, 1.5A max.@ 240 VAC Hz

Current (enclosure heater) 2A max @ 120 VAC, 1 A @ 240VAC

Contact Rating(Inductive Load)

250V, 3A N.O. contact, 1.5A N.C. contact24V, 1A N.O. and N.C. contact

Communication Analog: Isolated 4-20mA, 1200 ohms @ 24 VDC max -(concentration only)Serial: RS-232C (all parameters)Protocol: Modbus Gould RTU or Daniel RTU

Digital Outputs 2; (1) General Fault and (1) Hi/Lo Concentration Alarm per measurement cell

Operator’s Manual A–1


Physical Specifications

Size (typical)57” H × 30” W × 13” D(1450 mm H × 760 mm W × 330 mm D)

Weight (typical) Approx. 340 lbs (154 kg)

Sample Cell Construction 316L series polished stainless steel

Area Classification

Analyzer (electronics & laser)CSA Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C & D, T3 with heater (T3C without heater

Analyzer with Sample ConditioningSystem

SCS is assembled using electrical components that are certified for Class 1, Div. 2, Groups B, C & D, T3 or bet-ter. SCS assembly is not a certified product.

A–2 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

Sp

ecifica

tion

s

Operato

r’s Man

ual

A–3

ystem
Figure A–1 Standard outline schematic of 2-Pack analyzer s

2-P

ack

H2 S

/H

2 O A

naly

zer S

yste

m

A–4

4900002006 rev. K

8-1

5-1

3

lyzer system
Figure A–2 Standard outline schematic (side view) of 2-Pack ana

Sp

ecifica

tion

s

Operato

r’s Man

ual

A–5

zer system

DW

G. N

O.

RE

V.

Figure A–3 Standard flow schematic of 2-Pack analy

2-P

ack

H2 S

/H

2 O A

naly

zer S

yste

m

A–6

4900002006 rev. K

8-1

5-1

3
Figure A–4 Standard electrical schematic of 2-Pack analyzer system

Specifications

Spare PartsBelow is a list of spare parts for the 2-Pack H2S/H2O analyzer system with recommended quantities for 2 years of operation. Due to a policy of continuous improvement, parts and part numbers may change without notice. Not all parts listed are included on every analyzer. When ordering, please specify the system serial number to ensure that the correct parts are identified.

Table A–2 Replacement parts for H2S & H2O analyzer

Part Number Description 2 YR

QTY

H2S Analyzer

8000002199 Temperature Control Board a

a. Contact SpectraSensors’ service department before attempting replacement. Replacing this component without technical support could cause damage to other components. Contact ser-vice at 1-800-619-2861 (option 2) or [email protected].

-

2900000090 4-20 mA Current Loop Board -

8000002203 Power Supply Assembly, 120/240 VAC 50/60 Hz 1 -

8000002300 Power Supply Assembly, 24 VDC 1

0190217106 External Serial Output Cable -

0190230011 Keypad Assembly 1 -

2460100002 Display Assembly 1 -

0220313100 Relay Control Board 1 -

4500002002 Relay, DC12V SPDT 3 A/120 VAC 1 -

0210117102 Pressure Transducer Assembly 1 -

0210117103 Temperature Transducer Assembly 1 -

0219900006 Kit, Viton O-rings and Screws for Herriott Cell 1 1

0219900011 Kit, Fuse, AC/DC 1

H2O Analyzer

0190213000 Temperature Control Board -

2300000030 4-20 mA Current Loop Board -

8000002203 Power Supply Assembly, 120/240 VAC 50/60 Hz-

8000002300 Power Supply Assembly, 24 VDC

0190217106 External Serial Cable -

0190230011 Keypad Assembly -

0190231000 Display Assembly -

4500002002 Relay, SPDT, D12VDC, 3 A/125 VAC -



Table A-2 Replacement parts for H2S & H2O analyzer (Continued)


QTY

H2O Analyzer (Continued)

0210117102 Pressure Transducer Assembly -

0219900005 Kit, Spares (O-rings, screws), Viton, 2-Pass Cell -

0219900011 Kit, Fuse, AC/DC 1

General

0219900007 Kit, Cleaning Tools, Optical Cell -

4900002006 SS2100 2-Pack Operator’s Manual Rev. K, additional copies -


6200002480 Modular Sample System, Parker IFS156-STDDFS-2A-I4NV -

6101673407 Membrane Separator, Modular, Genie MG-3407-SS -

61016MG5X7 Element, Membrane Separator, Modular, Genie MG-5X7 2

6134100274 Flowmeter (w/Valve), 2 SLPM, 1/4” FNPT (SS), King 74C123G081123810

-

6134100674 Flowmeter (w/Valve), 6 SLPM, 1/4” FNPT (SS), King 74C123G081523810

-

2800002041 Rebuild Kit, Flowmeter, Viton, King 7430 4

6200002406 Pressure Regulator, 1–30 psig, Modular, Parker DM4001SK2PG -

6200002407 Rebuild Kit, Pressure Regulator, 1-30 psig, Modular Parker 53310150-1

-

6100002004 Pressure Gauge, 0–30 psig, McDaniel SBL -

6200002006 Pressure Gauge, 0–60 psig, McDaniel SCL -

6200002410 Relief Valve, 25–50 psig, Modular, Parker IF-RL4A-VT-1P-SS-KB -

6200002471 Filter Element & O-ring, 10-micron, Modular, Parker 53310150-1

2

6200002399 Ball Valve, 2-Way, Modular, Parker IF-B2LJ2-V-SS -

1400402310 Heater, 200 W, 120 VAC, Intertec CP Veritherm CPA 200-T3-100-120V

-

1400412304 Heater, 200 W, 240 VAC, Intertec CP Veritherm DPA-200-T3-40-230V

5300002004 Temperature Controller, 120 VAC, Intertec TC CD E1 S J - 50C -

1400403260 Temperature Controller, 240 VAC, Intertec TC ATEX AI S10-60C-230V

A–8 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

Specifications

Table A-2 Replacement parts for H2S & H2O analyzer (Continued)


QTY


6131401004 Solenoid Valve, 3-Way, 120 VAC, 1/8” FNPT, Bürkert 98124074 1

6131401003 Solenoid Valve, 3-Way, 230 VAC, 1/8” FNPT, Bürkert 98123905

55032340B6 Temperature Gauge, (3” Dia), 200F, 4” Stem, 1/2” NPT, Reotemp AA-040-1-D43-TG

-

6132210102 Pressure Regulator, 25 psig, 1/8” FNPT (SS) Go CPR1-1A01ACC111

-

0900002146 Stainless Steel Mirror -

8000002207 Kit, H2S Scrubber/Indicator, 2” Dia.

18000002207-R Kit, H2S Scrubber/Indicator, 2” Dia., Refurbished

8000002209 Kit, H2S Scrubber/Indicator, 3” Dia.

8000002209-R Kit, H2S Scrubber/Indicator, 3” Dia., Refurbished




A–10 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

Appendix B: Troubleshooting the Analyzer

This section presents recommendations and solutions to common problems, such as gas leaks, contamination, excessive sampling gas temperatures and pressures, and electrical noise. If your analyzer does not appear to be hampered by one of these related problems, refer to “Service Contact” on page B-17.

Gas LeaksProbably the most common cause of erroneous measurements is outside air leaking into the sample supply line. It is recommended the supply lines be periodically leak-tested, especially if the analyzer has been relocated or has been replaced or returned to the factory for service and the sample lines have been reconnected.

ContaminationContamination and long exposure to high humidity are valid reasons for periodically cleaning the gas sampling lines. Contamination in the gas sampling lines can potentially find its way to the sample cell and deposit on the optics or interfere with the measurement in some other way. Although the analyzer is designed to withstand some contamination, it is recommended to always keep the sampling lines as contamination free as possible.

To keep the sampling lines clean:1. Make sure that a membrane separator filter (included with most

systems) is installed ahead of the analyzer and operating normally. Replace the membrane if necessary. If liquid enters the cell and accumulates on the internal optics, a fault will result (Laser Power Low Alrm [FS 5.13], Power Fail [v2.50]).

Do not use plastic tubing of any kind for sample lines. Plastic tubing is permeable to moisture and other substances which can contaminate the sample stream. SpectraSensors recommends using 1/4” O.D x 00.035” wall thickness, seamless stainless steel tubing.


Operator’s Manual B–1


2. If mirror contamination is suspected, see “Cleaning the Mirrors” on page B-2.

3. Turn off the sample valve at the tap in accordance with site lock-out, tag-out rules.

4. Disconnect the gas sampling line from the supply port of the analyzer.

5. Wash the sampling line with alcohol or acetone and blow dry with mild pressure from a dry air or nitrogen source.

6. Once the sampling line is completely free of solvent, reconnect the gas sampling line to the supply port of the analyzer.


Cleaning the MirrorsIf contamination makes its way into the cell and accumulates on the internal optics, a fault will result (Laser Power Low Alrm [FS 5.13], Power Fail [v2.50]). If mirror contamination is suspected, please consult with your factory sales representative before attempting to clean the mirrors. If advised to do so, use the following procedure.

Determining the type of cell mirror:

Measurement cells will come equipped with either a glass or stainless steel mirror. Before determining whether to clean or replace the mirror, identify the type of measurement cell being used in the analyzer. There are four types of measurement cells; 0.1-m, 0.8-m, 8-m and 28-m. Refer to Figure B–1.

This procedure should be used ONLY when necessary and is not part of routine maintenance. To avoid compromising the system warranty, contact SpectraSensors Technical Service Group at 1-800-619-2861 (or by e-mail at [email protected]) or your local representative before cleaning mirrors

INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION - The sample cell assembly contains a low-power, 10 mW MAX, CW Class 3b invisible laser with a wavelength between 750-3000 nm. Never open the sample cell flanges or the optical assembly unless the power is turned off.

LASER RADIATION

AVOID EXPOSURE TO BEAM

CLASS 3B LASER PRODUCT

B–2 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

Troubleshooting the Analyzer

The stainless steel mirrors are used with 0.1-m and 0.8-m measurement cells only and have been identified with an “X” engraved on the external side of the mirror. Glass mirrors can be used on any size cell. To determine the type of mirror being used for the system cell:

1. Feel at the bottom of the cell for the engraved “X” marking. Refer to Figure B–2 below.

2. If the surface is smooth, a glass mirror is being used.

Figure B–1 Measurement cell types

0.1-m

0.8-m CELL 8-m/28-m

Figure B–2 Stainless steel mirror marking



3. If the surface is rough, or an engraving is detected, a stainless steel mirror is being used.

To clean the mirror, refer to the instructions “To clean the mir-rors” on page B-4. To replace a stainless steel mirror, refer to the instructions for “Stainless steel mirror replacement” on page B-6.

Tools and supplies

• Lens cleaning cloth (Cole Parmer® EW-33677-00 TEXWIPE® Alphawipe® Low-Particulate Clean Room Wipes or equivalent)

• Reagent-grade isopropanol (ColeParmer® EW-88361-80 or equivalent)

• Small drop dispenser bottle (Nalgene® 2414 FEP Drop Dispenser Bottle or equivalent)

• Acetone-impenetrable gloves (North NOR CE412W Nitrile Chemsoft™ CE Cleanroom Gloves or equivalent)

• Hemostat (Fisherbrand™ 13-812-24 Rochester-Pean Serrated Forceps)

• Bulb blower or dry compressed air/nitrogen

• Torque wrench

• Permanent marker

• Flashlight

To clean the mirrors

1. Power down the analyzer following the procedure outlined under “To power down the analyzer” in the appropriate firmware operations chapter.

Do not attempt to replace a glass mirror with a stainless steel mirror or system calibration may be adversely affected.

The sample cell assembly contains a low-power, 10 mW MAX, CW Class 3b invisible laser with a wavelength between 750-3000 nm. Never open the sample cell flanges or the optical assembly unless the power is turned off.

B–4 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13


2. Isolate the analyzer from the sample bypass flow by following the procedure outlined under “To isolate the measurement sample cell for short-term shutdown” on page 3-7.

3. If possible, purge the system with nitrogen for 10 minutes.

4. Carefully mark the orientation of the mirror assembly on the cell body.

5. Gently remove the mirror assembly from the cell by removing the 4 (28- or 8-m measurement cell) or 6 (0.1-m or 0.8-m measurement cell) socket-head cap screws and set on a clean, stable and flat surface.

6. Look inside the sample cell at the top mirror using a flashlight to ensure that there is no contamination on the top mirror.

7. Remove dust and other large particles of debris from the lower mirror using a bulb blower or dry compressed air/nitrogen. Pressurized gas duster products are not recommended as the propellent may deposit liquid droplets onto the optic surface.



Careful marking of the mirror orientation is critical to restoring system performance upon reassembly after cleaning.


Always handle the optical assembly by the edge of the mount. Never touch the coated surfaces of the mirror.

SpectraSensors does not recommend cleaning the top mirror. If the top mirror is visibly contaminated, contact your factory service representative.



8. Put on clean acetone-impenetrable gloves.

9. Double fold a clean sheet of lens cleaning cloth and clamp near and along the fold with the hemostats or fingers to form a “brush.”

10. Place a few drops of isopropanol onto the mirror and rotate the mirror to spread the liquid evenly across the mirror surface.

11. With gentle, uniform pressure, wipe the mirror from one edge to the other with the cleaning cloth only once and only in one direction to remove the contamination. Discard the cloth.

12. Repeat with a clean sheet of lens cleaning cloth to remove the streak left by the first wipe. Repeat, if necessary, until there is no visible contamination on the mirror.

13. Carefully replace the mirror assembly onto the cell in the same orientation as previously marked making sure the O-ring is properly seated.

14. Tighten the 4 socket-head cap screws evenly with a torque wrench to 30 in-lbs (28- or 8-m measurement cell) or 13 in-lbs (0.1-m, 0.8-m measurement cell).

Stainless steel mirror replacement

If your system has been configured with a stainless steel mirror in the 0.1-m or 0.8-m measurement cell, use the following instructions for replacing the mirror.

1. Power down the analyzer following the procedure outlined in the section called ““Powering Down the Analyzer” in the appropriate firmware operations chapter.

2. Isolate the analyzer from the sample bypass flow by shutting off the appropriate valve(s) and/or pressure regulator.

Never rub an optical surface, especially with dry tissues, as this can mar or scratch the coated surface.

If stainless steel mirrors are replacing another version of mirror in the field, such as glass, the analyzer may need to be returned to the factory for re-calibration to ensure optimal cell function. Refer to “Service Contact” on page B-17.


B–6 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13


3. If possible, purge the measurement cell with nitrogen for 10 minutes.

4. Gently remove the mirror assembly from the cell by removing the socket-head cap screws and set on a clean, stable and flat surface.

5. Confirm need to replace mirror due to contamination. If yes, set mirror aside.

6. Put on clean acetone-impenetrable gloves.

7. Obtain the new stainless steel mirror. Refer to Figure B–3.

8. Check the O-ring.

a. If a new O-ring is needed, apply grease on fingertips and then to the new O-ring.

b. Place newly greased O-ring into the groove around the outside of the mirror taking care not to touch the mirror surface.

9. Carefully place the new stainless steel mirror onto the cell making sure the O-ring is properly seated.



Always handle the optical assembly by the edge of the mount. Never touch the optical surfaces of the mirror.

Figure B–3 Stainless steel mirror - mirror side up



10. Tighten the socket-head cap screws evenly with a torque wrench to 13 in-lbs.

Excessive Sampling Gas Temperatures and PressuresThe embedded software is designed to produce accurate measurements only within the allowable cell operating range (see Table A–1 on page A–1).

Pressures and temperatures outside these ranges will trigger a Pressure Low Alarm, Pressure High Alarm, Temp Low Alarm, or Temp High Alarm fault (FS 5.13) or P/T Fail fault (v2.50).

Electrical NoiseHigh levels of electrical noise can interfere with laser operation and cause it to become unstable. Always connect the analyzer to a properly grounded power source.

Peak Tracking Reset Procedure (FS 5.13)The analyzer’s software is equipped with a peak tracking function that keeps the laser scan centered on the absorption peak. Under some circumstances, the peak tracking function can get lost and lock onto the wrong peak. If the PeakTk Restart Alarm is displayed, the peak tracking function should be reset.

To reset the Peak Tracking function:1. Press the # key followed by the 2 key.

The cell temperature operating range for analyzers that are equipped with heated enclosures is equal to the enclosure temperature setpoint ±5 °C.

If the pressure, temperature, or any other readings on the LCD appear suspect, they should be checked against the specifications (see Table A–1 on page A–1).


FS 5.13-XXXX

B–8 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13


The LCD prompts for a numeric password. Enter the user password (3142) on the keypad, then press the * key to enter the number to enter Mode 2.

2. Starting with the first parameter that displays, press the * key to cycle through the screens until the Peak Tracking parameter displays.

3. Press 2 (RST or Reset) followed by the * key. The peak tracking function will return the current analyzer midpoint to the factory default midpoint, and then automatically revert the parameter value to its setting before the reset was initiated. In most cases, the peak tracking should be set to 1 for on.

4. Press the * key to cycle through the screens until the General Alarm DO parameter displays.

5. Press 2 (RESET) followed by the * key. The General Fault relay and any active alarms will be reset to the ‘Normal’ state. After the relay resets, this parameter will automatically revert to the setting before the reset was initiated.

6. Press the mode key # followed by 1 to return to Mode 1 (Normal Mode).

Peak Tracking Reset Procedure (v2.50)The analyzer’s software is equipped with a peak tracking function that keeps the laser scan centered on the absorption peak. Under some circumstances, the peak tracking function can get lost and lock onto the wrong peak. If the


<SET PARAMETER MODE>PeakTracking10:Off 1:On 2:Rst

<SET PARAMETER MODE>General Alarm DO20:L 1:NonL 2:Reset



difference between PkDf and PkD1 is more than 4, or Track Fail fault is displayed, the peak tracking function should be reset.

To check the PkDf and PkD1 values:1. Press the # key followed by the 4 key to enter Mode 4 (Diagnostic

Parameters).

2. Compare the values for PkDf and PkD1. If the difference is more than 4, reset the peak tracking function.

To reset Peak Tracking:1. Press the # key followed by the 2 key. The LCD will prompt for a

numeric password. Enter the user password (3142) on the keypad,

then press the * key to enter Mode 2 (Set Parameter Mode).

2. Press the * key to cycle through the screens until the Peak Tracking parameter appears.

3. Press 2 (RESET) followed by the * key. The peak tracking function will cycle off then on and reset.

4. Press the mode key # followed by 1 to return to Mode 1 (Normal Mode).

PP2F:8190 PkDf:34.00Powr:2538 PkD1:34.00Indx: 301Zero: -24


v2.50 5-24-13 DM

<SET PARAMETER MODE>Peak Tracking10:Off 1:Track 2:Reset

B–10 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13


Instrument ProblemsIf the instrument does not appear to be hampered by gas leaks, contamination, excessive sampling gas temperatures and pressures, or electrical noise, refer to Table B–1 before contacting your sales representative for service.

Table B–1 Potential instrument problems and solutions

Symptom Response

Non-Operation (at start up) Is the power connected to both the analyzer and power source? Is the switch on?

Non-Operation (after start up) Is the power source good? (100-250 VAC @ 50-60 Hz, 9-16 VDC, 18-32 VDC).

Check fuse(s). If bad, replace with equivalent amperage, slow-blow fuse.

Contact a factory sales representative for service information.

Laser Power Low Alrm fault (FS 5.13)

Turn off the power to the unit and check the optical head cables for a loose connection. Do not disconnect or reconnect any optical head cables with the power connected.

Check the inlet and outlet tubes to see if they are under any stress. Remove the connections to the inlet and outlet tubes and see if the power goes up. Perhaps the existing tubing needs to be replaced with stainless steel flexible tubing.

Press # 6 to capture diagnostic data and send the file to SpectraSensors.

Possible alignment problem. Contact a factory sales representative for service information.

Possible mirror contamination issue. Contact a factory sales representative for service information. If advised to do so, clean the mirrors by following the instructions under “To clean the mir-rors” on page B-4.



Table B-1 Potential instrument problems and solutions (Continued)

Symptom Response

Power Fail (v2.50) Turn off the power to the unit and check the optical head cables for a loose connection. Do not disconnect or reconnect any optical head cables with the power connected.

Verify power failure by pressing # 4 and checking the DC value. If it is greater than 500, then the Power Fail fault is spurious. Return to # 1 and see if the error has changed.

Check the inlet and outlet tubes to see if they are under any stress. Remove the connections to the inlet and outlet tubes and see if the power goes up. Perhaps the existing tubing needs to be replaced with stainless steel flexible tubing.


Possible alignment problem. Contact a factory sales representative for service information.

Possible mirror contamination issue. Contact a factory sales representative for service information. If advised to do so, clean the mirrors by following the instructions under “To clean the mir-rors” on page B-4.

Pressure too Low or Pressure too High fault (FS 5.13)

Check that the actual pressure in the measurement cell is within specifica-tion.

Check the connector on the pressure transducer. Check the pressure connec-tor on the backplane board.

Temp Low Alarm or Temp High Alarm fault (FS 5.13)

Check that the actual temperature in the measurement cell is within specifi-cation. For systems with a heated enclosure, check that the temperature in the measurement cell is within +/-5 °C of the specified enclosure temper-ature.

B–12 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13



Symptom Response

Temp Low Alarm or Temp High Alarm fault (Continued) (FS 5.13)

Check the connector on the cell tem-perature sensor. Check the tempera-ture connector on the backplane board. (Note: A temperature reading greater than 150 °C indicates a short circuit on the temperature sensor leads; a read-ing of less than –30 °C indicates an open circuit).

Null Fail (v2.50) Verify Null Fail fault by pressing # 4 and checking the zero reading is out-side the range of -40 to 40. If not, the Null Fail fault is spurious. Return to #1 and see if the error has changed.

Move the jumper JMP1 on the HC12 main board next to the pre-pot.


Spectrum Fail (v2.50) Verify Spectrum Fail fault by pressing # 4 and checking the index value. If it is within a few counts of xleftvmr or xrightvmr, then it is a real Spectrum Fail fault.

Turn off the power to the unit and check the optical head cables for a loose connection. Do not disconnect or reconnect any optical head cables with the power connected.

Turn the analyzer off for 30 seconds and then turn it on again.

Reset the peak tracking.

If the index is within a few counts of 240, then decrease the midpoint value by 3 mA. (This is most likely if the unit is either very hot or very cold com-pared to the normal operating temper-ature).

If the index is within a few counts of 300, then increase the midpoint value by 3 mA. (This is most likely if the unit is either very hot or very cold com-pared to the normal operating temper-ature).




Symptom Response

Spectrum Fail (v2.50) (Continued) Press # 6 to capture diagnostic data and send the file to SpectraSensors.

P/T Fail (v2.50) Check that the actual pressure in the measurement cell is within specification (see Table A–1 on page A–1).

If the pressure reading is incorrect, check the connector on the pressure transducer. Check the pressure connec-tor on the backplane board.

Check that the actual temperature in the measurement cell is within specifi-cation (see Table A–1 on page A–1).

If the temperature reading is incorrect, check the connector on the cell temper-ature sensor. Check the temperature connector on the backplane board. (Note: A temperature reading greater than 150 °C indicates a short circuit on the temperature sensor leads; a read-ing of less than –40 °C indicates an open circuit).

Track Fail (v2.50) Press #4 and see if PkDf and PkD1 differ by more than 4, otherwise erro-neous error.

Reset the peak tracking function (see “To reset Peak Tracking” on page B-10).

Front panel display is not lit and no char-acters appear

Check for correct voltage on terminal block input. Observe polarity on DC powered units.

Check for correct voltage after fuses.

Check for 5 VDC on red wires, 12 VDC on yellow wires, and 24 VDC on orange wires from power supply (black wires are ground).

Check connections on display commu-nication and power cables.

Strange characters appear on front panel display

Check connections on display commu-nication cable.

Pressing keys on front panel do not have specified effect

Check connections on keypad cable.

B–14 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13



Symptom Response

System stuck in Fit Delta Exceeds Limit for greater than 30 minutes (FS 5.13)

Contact a factory sales representative for service information.

Not getting enough flow to the sample cell.

Check both the micro filter and mem-brane separator for contamination. Replace if necessary.

Check if supply pressure is sufficient.

No reading on device connected to cur-rent loop

Make sure that connected device can accept a 4-20 mA signal. The analyzer is set to source current.

Make sure the device is connected to the correct terminals (see Table 2–3 on page 2–16 or Table 2–4 on page 2–18).

Check the open circuit voltage (35-40 VDC) across the current loops ter-minals (see Table 2–3 on page 2–16 or Table 2–4 on page 2–18).

Replace the current loop device with a milliampere meter and look for current between 4 mA and 20 mA. A voltmeter connected across a 249-ohm resistor can be used instead of the milliampere meter; it should read between 1 and 5 volts.

Current loop is stuck at 4 mA or 20 mA Check display for error message. If alarm has been triggered, reset the alarm.

On the current loop board, check the voltage between the end of resistor R1 closest to the jumper and ground. If the concentration reading is high, the voltage should be near 1 VDC. If the concentration reading is low, the volt-age should be near 4.7 VDC. If not, the problem is probably on the ARM9 main board. Return to factory for service.

Reading seems to always be high by a fixed amount

Capture diagnostic data and send the file to SpectraSensors (see “To read diagnostic data with HyperTermi-nal” on page 5-6 or page 8–4).

See “Adjusting Analyzer Reading to Match Specific Standard(s)” on page 4-32 or page 7–18.




Symptom Response

Reading seems to always be low by a fixed amount



Reading seems to always be high by a fixed percentage


Check that Peak Tracking is enabled (see “To change parameters in Mode 2” on page 4-13 or page 7–9).


Reading seems to always be low by a fixed percentage



Reading displays 0.0 or seems relatively low


Reading is erratic or seems incorrect Check for contamination in the sample system, especially if the readings are much higher than expected.


Reading goes to “0” If 4-20 mA Alarm Action is set to 2, look on display for an error message (see “To change parameters in Mode 2” on page 4-13 or page 7–9).

Gas concentration is equal to zero.

B–16 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13


Service ContactIf the troubleshooting solutions do not resolve the problem, contact customer service. To return the unit for service or replacement, refer to "Return Material Authorization".


Symptom Response

Reading goes to full scale If 4-20 mA Alarm Action is set to 1, look on display for an error message (see “To change parameters in Mode 2” on page 4-13 or page 7–9).

Gas concentration is greater than or equal to full scale value.

Serial output is displaying garbled data Make sure the computer COM port is set for 19200 baud, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, no parity, and no flow control. (FS 5.13)

Make sure the computer COM port is set for 9600 baud, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, no parity, and no flow control. (v2.50)

Be sure no other programs are using the COM port selected.

Make sure the connections are good. Verify the correct pin connections with an ohmmeter.

Serial output is providing no data Make sure the analyzer is operating in Mode 1 and readings are being dis-played on the LCD.

Be sure no other programs are using the COM port selected.

Make sure the computer COM port is set for 19200 baud, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, no parity, and no flow control.

Make sure the connections are good. Verify the correct pin connections with an ohmmeter.

Make sure to select the correct COM port into which the cable is plugged.

LCD does not update. Unit is locked up for more than 5 minutes.

Switch off power, wait 30 seconds, and then switch power back on.



Customer Service4333 W Sam Houston Pkwy N, Suite 100Houston, TX 77043-1223

For SpectraSensors North America Service:

Phone: (800) 619-2861, and press 2 for ServiceFax: (713) 856-6623 E-mail: [email protected]

For SpectraSensors International Service, please contact the SpectraSensors distributor in your area, or contact:

Phone: (713) 466-3172, and press 2 for ServiceFax: (713) 856-6623 E-mail: [email protected]

Return Material AuthorizationIf returning the unit is required, obtain a Return Materials Authorization (RMA) Number from Customer Service before returning the analyzer to the factory. Your service representative can determine whether the analyzer can be serviced on site or should be returned to the factory.

DisclaimersSpectraSensors accepts no responsibility for consequential damages arising from the use of this equipment. Liability is limited to replacement and/or repair of defective components.

This manual contains information protected by copyright. No part of this guide may be photocopied or reproduced in any form without prior written consent from SpectraSensors.

WarrantyThe manufacturer warrants the items delivered shall be free from defects (latent and patent) in material and workmanship for a period of one year after delivery to the Buyer. The Buyer’s sole and exclusive remedy under this warranty shall be limited to repair or replacement. Defective goods must be returned to the manufacturer and/or its distributor for valid warranty claims. This warranty shall become inapplicable in instances where the items have been misused or otherwise subjected to negligence by the Buyer.

Notwithstanding any other provision of this contract, no other warranties, whether statutory or arising by operation of law, expressed or implied, including but not limited to those of merchantability or fitness for particular purpose, shall apply to the goods or services hereunder, other than the repair and replacement warranty above. Seller shall in no event be liable to Buyer or any third party for any damage, injury or loss, including loss of use or any direct or indirect incidental or consequential damages of any kind.


B–18 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

Appendix C: Water Correlation

Water ContentIn the context of gas analyzers, water content refers to the concentration of water vapor in the gaseous phase. Water content is typically stated as mole, mass or volume fraction, which are independent of a reference state, or as mass of water per volume of gas, which is dependent on a reference state. For relatively low water content, the mole fraction of water in the gaseous phase (yw) is typically given in dimensionless form as parts per million (ppm),

×106 [ppm] , (1)

where nw is the number of moles of water, nm is the number of moles of the “dry” mixture. For mass and volume fraction, the units would be ppm(m) and ppm(v) or ppmv, respectively. In the event the water content is extremely low, parts per billion (ppb) or even parts per trillion (ppt) may be used.

Water content expressed as mass of water per volume of gas is typically given in milligrams per normal cubic meter (mg/Nm3), where the letter “N” indicates normal reference conditions (typically 0°C and 1atm), or pounds per million standard cubic feet (lb/MMscf), where “s” indicates standard reference conditions (typically 60°F and 1atm). As shown in Table C–1, the definition of reference conditions varies considerably, and thus, should be specified explicitly when using units dependent on a reference state. Here, normal reference conditions are = 101325Pa and = 273.15K.

The conversion of water content (WC) from mole fraction to mass per volume of gas (mg/Nm3) is given by,

[mg/Nm3] , (2)

where Mw is the molecular weight of water (18015.2 mg/mol), TN is the temperature at normal reference conditions (K), PN is the pressure at normal reference conditions (Pa), ZN is the compressibility of the “dry” gas mixture at normal reference conditions, and R is the universal gas constant (8.3145 J/mol•K). For perfect gases, and

×803745 [mg/Nm3] . (3)

ywnw

nw nm+-------------------=

PN TN

WCyw

1 yw–--------------

MwPNZNRTN-----------------=

ZN 1=

WCyw

1 yw–--------------=

Operator’s Manual C–1


Dew PointIn some instances, it is desired to express the water content in terms of the water “dew point” for the gas mixture. The water dew point of a gas is the temperature at which the gas is saturated with water at a given pressure. Saturation implies that the water vapor is in equilibrium with water in the liquid or solid phase (depending on which is present). When water vapor is in equilibrium with the solid (ice) phase, the dew point is often referred to as the “frost point.”

Dew Point ConversionVarious correlations and standards have been developed (some based on Raoult’s law) that are currently used in natural gas practice for converting from water dew point temperature to water content, such as ASTM 1142-95 (2006) [8], Bucacek [9], the Arden Buck method and ISO 18453:2006 [10].

Raoult’s Law

Assuming ideal gas behavior, the simplest thermodynamically based equation for calculating water content at the dew point temperature is based on Raoult’s law [7]

, (4)

where yw is the mole fraction of water in the vapor phase, P is the total pressure, xw is the mole fraction of water in the liquid phase, and is the saturation (vapor) pressure of pure water at the dew point temperature T. Assuming the liquid phase is pure water, i.e., there is negligible gas solubility,

and we get

. (5)

Table C–1 Common reference conditions

T(K)

P(Pa) Organization

273.15 100000 International Union of Pure and Applied Chemistry (IUPAC) [1]

288.15 101325 International Organization for Standardization (ISO) [2]

298.15 100000 National Bureau of Standards (NBS) [3]

288.71 100000 Society of Petroleum Engineers (SPE) [4]

293.15 101325 National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST)

288.71 101560 Organization of the Petroleum Exporting Countries (OPEC) [5]

288.71 101325 Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHEA) [6]

ywP xwPwsat T( )=

Pwsat

xw 1=

ywPw

sat T( )P

------------------=

C–2 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

Water Correlation

Expressions of this type do not take into account the composition of the gas mixture. Although Eq. (5) is of limited utility because of the simplifying assumptions on which it is based, such as perfect gas behavior, reasonable estimates of water content can be obtained for pressures up to 0.4MPa, above which real gas effects become significant.

Arden Buck Equations

The Arden Buck equations are a group of empirical correlations that relate the saturation vapor pressure to temperature for moist air at close to atmospheric pressure. The curve fits have been optimized for more accuracy than the Goff–Gratch equation in the range −80 to 50°C. [11]

A set of several equations were developed, each of which is applicable in a different situation.

Enhancements to the method were published in 1996.[12]

A humidity conversion software (HCONL), developed by Buck Research Instruments LLC, is commonly used as a simple tool that easily converts any humidity parameter to any other humidity units.

ASTM1

ASTM 1142-95 (2006) includes two correlations, the first of which (referred to here as ASTM1) is a variation of Eq. (5) that expresses the water content in terms of the weight of saturated water vapor, or [8]

, (6)

where WC is the water content (lb/MMscf) at reference conditions Tb (R) and Pb (psia), w is the weight of saturated water vapor (lb/ft3), P is the pressure at which the dew point was determined (psia), and T is the observed dew point temperature (R). The reciprocal of w, or the specific volume of saturated water vapor (ft3/lb), is listed as a function of temperature in Table 1 of ASTM 1142-95 (2006) for temperatures ranging from 0°F to 100°F. Though not explicit in temperature due to the temperature dependence of w, given the water content, the corresponding dew point temperature can be solved for iteratively.

ASTM2

Bukacek proposed a relatively simple modified Raoult’s law approach where the water content of sweet gas is calculated using the ideal expression of Eq. (5) supplemented by a deviation factor [9],

Arden Buck equations are not typically used for natural gas applications; however, results are comparable at near atmospheric pressures.

WC w 106×( )PbP------ T

Tb-----=


/wiki/Saturation_vapor_pressure

/wiki/Vapour_pressure_of_water

/wiki/Vapour_pressure_of_water

/wiki/Goff%E2%80%93Gratch_equation


, (7)

where WC is the water content (g/Nm3), is the saturation vapor pressure of pure water (MPa), P is the total pressure of the system (MPa), and B is given by,

, (8)

where T is the dew point temperature (K). The saturation vapor pressure can be calculated using [13]

, (9)

where T is the temperature (K), Tc is the critical temperature of water (647.14K), Pc is the critical pressure of water (22.064MPa), and .

A simplified version of Eq. (7)

, (10)

(referred to here as ASTM2) is included in ASTM 1142-95 (2006) with coefficients A and B (referenced to R and psia) listed as a function of temperature in Table 2 for dew point temperatures ranging from –40°F to 440°F. Though not explicit in temperature due to the temperature dependence of A and B, given the water content, the corresponding dew point temperature can be solved for iteratively.

Although conveniently simplistic, neither ASTM method takes into account the actual gas composition. In addition, the range of data made available for the specific volume of saturated water vapor (ASTM1) or for the coefficients A and B (ASTM2) is somewhat limited.

ISO

Perhaps the most rigorous method to date is that of ISO 18453:2006. Based on an extensive study conducted by Groupe Europeen de Recherches Gazieres (GERG) [14], the ISO method uses an equation of state (EOS) approach to calculate water content from water dew point temperature. The semi-empirical Peng-Robinson (P-R) cubic EOS with repulsive and attractive terms has been found to adequately reproduce the behavior of fluids in the gas and liquid phase with the same equation. The P-R EOS for a pure component explicit in P is given by [15]

. (11)

WC 760.4( )Pw

sat

P--------- 0.016016B+=

Pwsat

Blog 1713.66–T

---------------------- 6.69449+=

lnPw

sat

Pc---------⎝ ⎠⎛ ⎞ Tc

T----- 7.85823τ– 1.83991τ1.5 11.7811τ3–+(=

22.6705+ τ3.5 1539393τ4– 1.77516τ7.5 )+

τ 1 T Tc⁄–=

WC AP--- B+=

Tb 520= Pb 14.7=

P T V,( ) RTV b–------------ a T( )

V2 2bV b2–+----------------------------------–=

C–4 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

Water Correlation

The coefficients are defined as

(12)

and

, (13)

where is the reduced temperature and is a non-dimensional function of the reduced temperature

, (14)

where is a substance-specific constant generalized using the acentric factor . Values for the critical pressure, critical temperature and acentric factor are listed in Table C–2.

Table C–2 Gas composition [14]

Component iPc

(MPa)Tc

(K)

Water (H2O) 1 22.064 647.14 0.34437

Methane (CH4) 2 4.599 190.55 0.01140

Ethane (C2H6) 3 4.872 305.33 0.09909

Nitrogen (N2) 4 3.399 126.26 0.03593

Carbon Dioxide (CO2) 5 7.386 304.21 0.22394

Propane (C3H8) 6 4.246 369.85 0.15611

i-Butane (C4H10) 7 3.640 407.85 0.18465

n-Butane (C4H10) 8 3.784 425.14 0.19777

b 0.07780RTcPc

---------=

a T( )0.45724R2Tc

2

Pc----------------------------------α Tr( )=

Tr T Tc⁄= α Tr( )

α Tr( ) 1 κ 1 Tr1 2⁄–( )+[ ]

2=

κ 0.37464 1.54226ω 0.26992ω2–+=ω

ω



For water specifically, the -function takes a different form in order to accurately reproduce the water vapor pressure over ice as well as liquid [14]

, (15)

where the coefficients, listed in Table C–3, take on different values depending on whether the temperature is above or below freezing.

Application of an equation of state to a mixture requires substituting mixture parameters for those of the pure component. The mixture parameters are related to pure component parameters by means of the mixing rules [16]

(16)

and

, (17)

where is the number of components in the mixture. The mole fraction of each component, , serves as a weight factor and the cross coefficients of the -term

Table C-2 Gas composition [14] (Continued)

Component iPc

(MPa)Tc

(K)

neo-Pentane (C5H12) 9 3.196 433.75 0.19528

i-Pentane (C5H12) 10 3.370 460.39 0.22606

n-Pentane (C5H12) 11 3.364 469.69 0.24983

Hexane/C6+ (C6H14) 12 3.020 507.85 0.29600

Table C–3 Coefficients for Eq. (15) [14]

Coefficient 223.15≤ T<273.16K 273.16≤T≤313.15K

0.106025 0.905436

2.683845 -0.213781

-4.75638 0.26005

ω

α

α Tr( ) 1 A1 1 Tr1 2⁄–( ) A2 1 Tr

1 2⁄–( )2

A3 1 Tr1 2⁄–( )

4+ + +[ ]

2=

A1

A2

A3

am T( ) xixjaij T( )

j 1=

nc

∑i 1=

nc

∑=

bm xibi

i 1=

nc

∑=

ncxi aij T( )

a

C–6 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

Water Correlation

(18)

are corrected with a temperature-dependent binary interaction parameter [14]

, (19)

where the coefficients and , listed in Table C–4, are typically determined by fitting vapor-liquid equilibrium data of binary mixtures with

and .

Table C–4 Binary interaction parameters [14]

i Componenti j Component

j

1 Water 2 Methane 0.6510 -1.3850

1 Water 3 Ethane 0.6350 -0.9300

1 Water 4 Nitrogen 0.4800 0

1 Water 5 Carbon Dioxide 0.1840 0.2360

1 Water 6 Propane 0.5300 0

1 Water 7 i-Butane 0.6900 0

1 Water 8 n-Butane 0.5000 0

1 Water 9 neo-Pentane 0.5000 0

1 Water 10 i-Pentane 0.6900 0

1 Water 11 n-Pentane 0.5000 0

1 Water 12 Hexane/C6+ 0.5000 0

2 Methane 3 Ethane -0.0026 0

2 Methane 4 Nitrogen 0.0311 0

2 Methane 5 Carbon Dioxide 0.0919 0

2 Methane 6 Propane 0.0140 0

2 Methane 7 i-Butane 0.0133 0

2 Methane 8 n-Butane 0.0230 0

2 Methane 9 neo-Pentane 0.0422 0

2 Methane 10 i-Pentane 0.0256 0

2 Methane 11 n-Pentane 0.0180 0

2 Methane 12 Hexane/C6+ -0.0056 0

3 Ethane 4 Nitrogen 0.0515 0

3 Ethane 5 Carbon Dioxide 0.1322 0

3 Ethane 6 Propane 0.0011 0

3 Ethane 7 i-Butane -0.0067 0

3 Ethane 8 n-Butane 0.0096 0

aij T( ) ai T( )aj T( ) 1 kij T( )–[ ]=

kij T( ) kij 0, kij 1,T

273.15---------------- 1–⎝ ⎠⎛ ⎞+=

kij 0, kij 1,

kij kji= kii kjj 0= =

kij 0, kij 1,



Table C-4 Binary interaction parameters [14]


j

3 Ethane 9 neo-Pentane 0.0230 0

3 Ethane 10 i-Pentane 0.0160 0

3 Ethane 11 n-Pentane 0.0078 0

3 Ethane 12 Hexane/C6+ -0.0100 0

4 Nitrogen 5 Carbon Dioxide -0.0170 0

4 Nitrogen 6 Propane 0.0852 0

4 Nitrogen 7 i-Butane 0.1033 0

4 Nitrogen 8 n-Butane 0.0800 0

4 Nitrogen 9 neo-Pentane 0.0930 0

4 Nitrogen 10 i-Pentane 0.0922 0

4 Nitrogen 11 n-Pentane 0.1000 0

4 Nitrogen 12 Hexane/C6+ 0.1496 0

5 Carbon Dioxide 6 Propane 0.1241 0

5 Carbon Dioxide 7 i-Butane 0.1200 0

5 Carbon Dioxide 8 n-Butane 0.1333 0

5 Carbon Dioxide 9 neo-Pentane 0.1260 0

5 Carbon Dioxide 10 i-Pentane 0.1219 0

5 Carbon Dioxide 11 n-Pentane 0.1222 0

5 Carbon Dioxide 12 Hexane/C6+ 0.1100 0

6 Propane 7 i-Butane -0.0078 0

6 Propane 8 n-Butane 0.0033 0

6 Propane 9 neo-Pentane 0 0

6 Propane 10 i-Pentane 0.0111 0

6 Propane 11 n-Pentane 0.0267 0

6 Propane 12 Hexane/C6+ 0.0007 0

7 i-Butane 8 n-Butane -0.0004 0

7 i-Butane 9 neo-Pentane 0 0

7 i-Butane 10 i-Pentane 0 0

7 i-Butane 11 n-Pentane 0 0

7 i-Butane 12 Hexane/C6+ 0 0

8 n-Butane 9 neo-Pentane 0 0

8 n-Butane 10 i-Pentane 0 0

8 n-Butane 11 n-Pentane 0.0174 0

8 n-Butane 12 Hexane/C6+ -0.0056 0

kij 0, kij 1,

C–8 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

Water Correlation

An equilibrium condition for each component can be derived in terms of the fugacity coefficient [17]

, (20)

where is the fugacity coefficient of component i in the liquid phase, is the mole fraction of component i in the liquid phase, is the fugacity coefficient of component i in the gaseous phase, and is the mole fraction of component i in the gaseous phase. For the PR-EOS, the fugacity coefficient is defined as [17]

, (21)

where Z is the compressibility factor for the mixture, and .

The compressibility factor is calculated from an equivalent form of Eq. (10) implicit in the compressibility factor [17]

. (22)

Given the mole fractions of the components of the gaseous mixture, , the dew point temperature is solved for iteratively by means of successive substitution using the following procedure:

1. Guess T.

2. Estimate the initial equilibrium ratios using the Wilson approximation [18].

3. Estimate the initial liquid mole fractions .

4. Calculate Z using Eq. (22) and using Eq. (20) with the vapor mole fractions, .

Table C-4 Binary interaction parameters [14] (Continued)


j

9 neo-Pentane 10 i-Pentane 0 0

9 neo-Pentane 11 n-Pentane 0 0

9 neo-Pentane 12 Hexane/C6+ 0 0

10 i-Pentane 11 n-Pentane 0.0600 0

10 i-Pentane 12 Hexane/C6+ 0 0

11 n-Pentane 12 Hexane/C6+ 0 0

kij 0, kij 1,

ϕilxi ϕi

vyi=

ϕil xi

ϕiv

yi

lnϕibibm------ Z 1–( ) ln Z B*–( )–=

A*

2 2B*-----------------

bibm------

2 ai T( )am T( )

-------------------- xj ai T( ) 1 kij–( )j∑–

⎝ ⎠⎜ ⎟⎛ ⎞

ln Z B* 1 2+( )+Z B* 1 2–( )+-------------------------------------–

A* am T( )P RT( )2⁄=B* bmP RT( )⁄=

Z3 1 B*–( )Z2– A* 2B*– 3B*2–( )Z A*B*– B*2 B*3+ + + 0=

yi

Ki ϕil ϕi

v⁄=Ki Pci

P⁄( )exp 5.373 1 ωi+( ) 1 T 1–ri–( )[ ]=

xi yi Ki⁄=ϕi

v

yi



5. Calculate Z using Eq. (22) and using Eq. (20) with the liquid mole fractions, .

6. Recalculate the liquid mole fractions .

7. Repeat steps 5 & 6 until .

8. Adjust T and repeat steps 2-7 until .

Method Comparisons for Natural GasMeasured dew point temperatures versus water content from the GERG report [14] for two pressures, 5bar and 100bar, are shown in Figure C–1, Figure C–2, Figure C–3 and Figure C–4 along with calculated results using the ASTM1, ASTM2 and ISO methods described above. The gas mixtures NG1, NG3, NG4 and NG7 are specified in Table C–5.

Table C–5 Experimental gas compositions [14]

Component NG1 NG3 NG4 NG7

Methane (CH4) 0.98210 0.88204 0.86483 0.70148

Ethane (C2H6) 0.00564 0.08360 0.06203 0.02520

Nitrogen (N2) 0.00840 0.00912 0.04871 0.01499

Carbon Dioxide (CO2) 0.00109 0.00000 0.00167 0.25126

Propane (C3H8) 0.00189 0.01763 0.01552 0.00394

i-Butane (C4H10) 0.00029 0.00293 0.00214 0.00067

n-Butane (C4H10) 0.00038 0.00441 0.00315 0.00074

neo-Pentane (C5H12) 0.00001 0.00003 0.00002 0.00003

i-Pentane (C5H12) 0.00007 0.00020 0.00061 0.00029

n-Pentane (C5H12) 0.00006 0.00004 0.00067 0.00022

Hexane/C6+ (C6H14) 0.00007 0.00000 0.00064 0.00118

ϕil

xi

xi' xi ϕiv ϕi

l⁄( )=xi' xi– 0≅

xi'i∑ 1≅

C–10 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

Water Correlation

Temperature [K]

Wat

erC

onte

nt[m

g/N

m3]

250 300 350101

102

103

104

ASTM1ASTM2ISOGERG Meas.

Natural Gas NG1

P=5 bar

P=100 bar

Figure C–1 Comparison of calculation results for ASTM1 [8], ASTM2 [9] and ISO [10] methods with experimental data from the GERG report [14] for mixture NG1

Temperature [K]

Wat

erC

onte

nt[m

g/N

m3]

250 300 350101

102

103

104


Natural Gas NG3

P=5 bar

P=100 bar




Temperature [K]

Wat

erC

onte

nt[m

g/N

m3]

250 300 350101

102

103

104


Natural Gas NG4

P=5 bar

P=100 bar


Temperature [K]

Wat

erC

onte

nt[m

g/N

m3]

250 300 350101

102

103

104


Natural Gas NG7


C–12 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

Water Correlation

The ASTM1 method agrees well with the experimental data at low pressure (5 bar) but deviates significantly at higher pressure (100 bar), especially at higher temperatures where the calculated dew points are always too high. Given that the ASTM1 method is based on ideal gas assumptions, it is expected that real gas behavior typical of the higher pressures would not be sufficiently reproduced.

Being of similar origin as the ASTM1 method, the ASTM2 method exhibits similar behavior, albeit with even less agreement, especially at lower temperatures where the calculated dew points are always too low (with the exception of the CO2-rich NG7 mixture at high pressure). Thus, if water content calculated by the ASTM2 method is used to control a drying process, water condensation may occur due to prematurely reaching the prescribed dew point. Discrepancies between the two ASTM methods is most likely due to the fact that data for a simple binary methane-water system was used in the development of the ASTM2 method [9].

The experimental water content data for the mixtures NG1, NG3, NG4 and NG7 at 60 bar are summarized in Figure C–5. Relative deviations between the courses tend to increase with decreasing dew point temperature. These deviations (~5K between NG4 and NG7 at 34mg/Nm3) illustrate the importance of accounting for the gas composition, especially when performing calculations with low water content at moderate to high pressure. Of the three methods discussed, only the ISO method takes into account the actual gas composition.

Temperature [K]

Wat

erC

onte

nt[m

g/N

m3]

250 260 270 280 290 300101

102

103

NG1NG3NG4NG7

P=60 bar

Figure C–5 Courses of measured water contents at 60 bar for natural gas mixtures NG1, NG3, NG4 and NG7



The ISO method is applicable to natural gas mixtures with compositions within the limits listed in Table C–6. Dew point temperatures calculated from water contents were validated to be generally within ±2K for pressures 0.5≤P≤10MPa and dew point temperatures 258.15≤T≤278.15K [14]. Due to the solid thermodynamic basis on which the method was developed, an extended working range of 0.1≤P≤30MPa and 223.15≤T≤313.15K is also considered valid [10]. Beyond the extended working range, however, the uncertainty in calculated dew point temperature is unknown.

In summary, for moderate to high water contents at low pressures, all three correlations produce acceptable results. Although somewhat more difficult to implement, the ISO method is arguably the more accurate of the methods (especially for low water contents and high pressures) and provides a great deal more range and flexibility.

The Arden Buck Method Comparison

The Arden Buck method was developed for air at near-atmospheric pressure and can be used for air and nitrogen backgrounds. The Arden Buck method can be used as an approximation of dew point in natural gas streams with very high levels of methane and inert gases, but as heavier hydrocarbons and CO2 concentrations increase, the Arden Buck method is unable to compensate for the interaction of the various molecules. Errors as high as 10°C will be reported in typical natural gas streams at typical pipeline pressures. Therefore, the use of the Arden Buck method should generally be avoided for natural gas streams.

Table C–6 Range of composition applicable to ISO method [10]

Compound mol %

Methane (CH4) ≥40.0

Ethane (C2H6) ≤20.0

Nitrogen (N2) ≤55.0

Carbon Dioxide (CO2) ≤30.0

Propane (C3H8) ≤4.5

i-Butane (C4H10) ≤1.5

n-Butane (C4H10) ≤1.5

neo-Pentane (C5H12) ≤1.5

i-Pentane (C5H12) ≤1.5

n-Pentane (C5H12) ≤1.5

Hexane/C6+ (C6H14) ≤1.5

C–14 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

Water Correlation

References[1] McNaught, A. D. and Wilkinson, A., eds., Compendium of Chemical

Terminology: IUPAC Recommendations (2nd Edition), Blackwell Science, Malden, MA, 1997.

[2] ISO 13443: Natural Gas – Standard Reference Conditions, International Organization for Standardization, Geneva, Switzerland, 1996.

[3] Wagman, D. D., Evans, W. H., Parker, V. B., Schumm, R. H., Halow, I., S Bailey, S. M., Churney, K. L. and Nuttall, R. L., “The NBS Tables of Chemical Thermodynamic Properties,” J. Phys. Chem. Ref. Data, Vol. 11, Suppl. 2, 1982.

[4] The SI Metric System of Units and SPE Metric Standard, Society of Petroleum Engineers of AIME, Richardson, TX, 1984.

[5] Ibrahim, O. ed., Annual Statistical Bulletin, Organization of the Petroleum Exporting Countries, Vienna, Austria, 2008.

[6] “Storage and Handling of Liquefied Petroleum Gases,” 29 CFR-Labor, Chapter XVII, Part 1910, Sect. 1910.110 and 1910.111, 1993.

[7] Prausnitz, J. M., Molecular Thermodynamics of Fluid-Phase Equilibria, Prentice-Hall, Inc., Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey, 1969.

[8] ASTM D 1142-95: Standard Test Method for Water Vapor Content of Gaseous Fuels by Measurement of Dew Point Temperature, ASTM International, West Conshohocken, Pennsylvania, 2006.

[9] Bukacek, R. F., “Equilibrium Moisture Content of Natural Gases,” Research Bulletin 8, Institute of Gas Technology, 1955.

[10] ISO 18453: Natural Gas-Correlation between Water Content and Water Dew Point, International Organization for Standardization, Geneva, Switzerland, 2006.

[11] Buck, A. L. (1981), “New equations for computing vapor pressure and enhancement factor”, J. Appl. Meteorol. 20: 1527–1532

[12] Buck Research Instruments, LLC, “Model CR-1A Hygrometer with Autofill Operating Manual”, Appendix 1: Humidity Conversion Equations, May 2012.

[13] Saul, A. and Wagner, W., “International Equations for the Saturation Properties of Ordinary Water Substance,” J Phys Chem Ref Data, 16:893-901, 1987.

[14] Oellrich, L. R. and Althaus, K., “Relationship between Water Content and Water Dew Point keeping in consideration the Gas Composition in the Field of Natural Gas,” GERG Technical Monograph TM14, Verein Deutsher Ingenieure, Duesseldorf, 2000.

[15] Peng, D. Y. and Robinson, D. B., “A New Two-Constant Equation of State,” Ind. Eng. Chem. Fundam., 15(1):59-64, 1976.


http://ams.allenpress.com/perlserv/?request=get-pdf&doi=10.1175%2F1520-0450%281981%29020%3C1527%3ANEFCVP%3E2.0.CO%3B2




[16] Copeman, T. W. and Mathias, P. M., “Recent Mixing Rules for Equations of State,” in Chao, K. C. ed., Equation of State: Theories and Applications, ACS SYmposium Series 300:352-370, 1986.

[17] Reid, R. C., Prausnitz, J. M. and Poling, B. E., The Properties of Liquids and Gases (4th Edition), McGraw-Hill Book Company, New York, New York, 1987.

[18] Wilson, G., “A Modified Redlich-Kwong Equation of State Applicable to General Physical Data Calculations,” Paper No. 15C, 65th AIChE National meeting, May, 1968.

[19] Avila, S., Blanco, S. T., Valesco, I., Rauzy, E. and Otin, S., “Thermodynamic Properties of Synthetic Natural Gases Part 4. Dew Point Curves of Synthetic Natural Gases and their Mixtures with Water: Measurement and Correlation,” Fluid Phase Equilibria 202:399-412, 2002.

C–16 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

Appendix D: Certifications of Conformity

Certificate of ComplianceCertificate: �� Master Contract: ��

Project: �� Date Issued: ��

��

Issued to: SpectraSensors, Inc.

11027 Arrow RouteRancho Cucamonga, CA 91730USAAttention: Paul Silva

The products listed below are eligible to bear the CSAMark shown with adjacent indicators 'C' and 'US' for

Canada and US or with adjacent indicator 'US' forUS only or without either indicator for Canada only.

��

Issued by: �� !��"�� #�$

PRODUCTSCLASS 2258 02 ��%&�''�&%(�%)��*+�,�(��-��.�/��0�1��)�2�34�5�CLASS 2258 82 ��%&�''�&%(�%)��*+�,�(��-��.�/��0�1��)�2�34�5��

& �3464 0�3��*'�'3�50��0�

�

Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C and D, T4;

��

(��2 �7��,�543��6��2 ��'3� ��,�0 8�''��9:�,��.��0!�� ;��3 0��3��<�2��=��./��>�,�?��<02�+5$13��3��:��?��( �$ ��31� �&�0 �(�@�-��1� �45��5��4 53��5� ��6��A&�3�B��A&�

� 8�#�2�53�23��345��6�� ?3 �5�8�2�55 234�5�

+501234� �)��0��345��

:&��<��:��%��&�53�23@��:��&��&�53�23

�&��<��:��%��&�53�23@��:��&��&�53�23

Operator’s Manual D–1


Certificate: �� Master Contract: ��


��

�

�

�3 ��

�

��( 4��2 �34642�34�5�0� ��5�3�� 3 �2�55 234�5��6��5#� ?3 �5�8�0 �42 �3��3 �� 8�#�2�53�23��$��40 0��#3 �,�0 8�''��3��2 ��543��

��:�2 �3464 0�0 �42 ��1�3�� 2�55 23 0�3��3 �� 8�#�2�53�23��$��40 0��#�,�0 8�''��-45�8�45�3�88�34�5��63 4��$��0123�45�3 �453 50 0��$$842�34�5�4��1�C 23�3�� 4 !��#�3 �8�2�8��13 ��43#� ��45��C1�4�04234�5�

��+6�3 �2 �3464 0�0 �42 �2�55 23 0�3��3 �� 8�#�2�53�23��6�3 �,�0 8�''��3��2 ��543�� 3 �$ ��31� �2�0 � 4� ��3 �5�(��3��?4�1��4 53��6��A&��3 5�3 �! �8 ��#�3 �� 88�� 4�5 0�3 3 �$ ��31� �2�0 ��6�3 ��33�2 0�0 �42 �

�

APPLICABLE REQUIREMENTS

�&:=&':�&��,��7 5 ��8�� D14� � 53��E�&�5�04�5��8 23�42�8�&�0 ��3�++

&:=&':�&��,��'$ 24�8��1�$�� 528��1� �

&:=&':�&��,��5�+52 504� ��8 23�42�8��D14$� 53�6��*� �45�&8��+��4�4�4�5��.�/��0�1��)�2�34�5�

&:=&':�&��'�6 3#�� D14� � 53��6��8 23�42�8��D14$� 53�6��, ��1� � 53��&�53��8�50�)��3��#�*� ��3��7 5 ��8�� D14� � 53�

:'+=+':��5�+52 504� ��8 23�42�8��D14$� 53�6��*� �45�&8��+��50�++��4�4�4�5��&8��+++�4�4�4�5��50��.�/��0�1��9&8��464 0;�)�2�34�5�

*)��3 ��0434�5��528��1� ��6��8 23�42�8��D14$� 53

*)��9�50��0434�5;��'�6 3#�� D14� � 53��6��8 23�42�8��D14$� 53�6��, ��1� � 53��&�53��8��50)��3��#�*� ��3��7 5 ��8�� D14� � 53�

D–2 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

Certifications of Conformity

Certificate of ComplianceCertificate: �� Master Contract: ��


��

Issued to: SpectraSensors, Inc.

11027 Arrow RouteRancho Cucamonga, CA 91730USAAttention: Mathias Schrempel

The products listed below are eligible to bear the CSAMark shown with adjacent indicators 'C' and 'US' for

Canada and US or with adjacent indicator 'US' forUS only or without either indicator for Canada only.

��

Issued by: ��

PRODUCTSCLASS 2258 02 �� !""� �#$��%�!�&'�!#$��(��)�*��+,�%� �-��.,CLASS 2258 82 �� !""� �#$��%�!�&'�!#$��(��)�*��+,�%� �-��.,��

��-�/��-��&"�"-�.��,

��-�0�

1�,,�'��,��.��2��+3,�0��4�� .��

$�� 2�,��.�-��/�� ,,�"-��5,��1,�""��6""��-��-��7��8� ��6��)*��95�:;�

$�53��-+�� $<�=�-��)��-��9$< �=�-��+-�)��-��;��(��+,��.��.��5>��.-��.��/��? �-��@��? �

��-�4�

1�,,�'��,��.��2��+3,�0��4�� .��

$�� 2�,��.�-��/�� ,,�"-��5,��1,�""��6""��9��+1�,��.��;��-��-��7�<�8� ��8� ��6��)*�

$�53��-+�� $< ��.��.��5>��.-��.��/��? �-��@��? �

Operator’s Manual D–3


Certificate: �� Master Contract: ��


��

�

APPLICABLE REQUIREMENTS

0#6 "0� ��#��2�.��1��A+��5�.-,�� .��.�!1� -�� 1� ��-�''

0#6 "0� ��#��4�.��.��/�!1� -�� 1�!A+�35�.-�9��-� -��2��+.��.�;

0#6 "0� ��#��"3� ��1��+�3�,��!. 1�,+��,

0#6 "0� ��#��<��7��#�.�'. �.��!1� -�� 1�!A+�35�.-�/��+,��.� 1�,,�'��,��.��)�*��+,�%� �-��.,

0#6 "0� ��#��7�� ,,� �.-��1�!A+�35�.-�'.�+,-��1��+ -,

0#"'6'"0��#�.�'. �.��!1� -�� 1�!A+�35�.-�/��+,��.� 1�,,�'��.��''��,��.�� 1�,,�'''��,��.,��.��)0*��+,�9 1�,,�/��;�%� �-��.,

&%��-��!��-��.��!. 1�,+��,�/��!1� -�� 1�!A+�35�.-

&%��7��-��!��-��.��'.�+,-��1� �.-��1�!A+�35�.-

�

D–4 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

INDEX

4-20 mA current loop 2–15, 4–33, 7–19

AAbsorption profile 1–5AC connection terminal block 2–11Acentric factor C–5Acetone B–2Acetone-impenetrable gloves B–4, B–6,

B–7Alarm relays 2–17, 2–18Alarms 4–35

Concentra High Alarm 7–20General Fault Alarm 3–12, 3–14,

4–2, 4–35, 4–37, 7–20High Concentration Alarm 7–20,

8–18Low Concentration Alarm 7–20System Faults 4–35User Alarms 4–37

Concentra High Alarm 4–21, 4–37Concentra Low Alarm 4–37Validation 1 Failed/Validation 2

Failed Alarm 4–37Validation Fail Alarm 4–40

Attenuation 1–4

BBackground gas 4–28, 4–29, 4–33, 4–40,

7–19, 7–22Beer-Lambert absorption law 1–4

CCalibrating the analyzer 4–41Cautions 1–1Cleaning

Gas sampling lines B–1Mirrors B–2

COM port B–17COM properties 5–1, 5–3, 8–1, 8–3Concentration 4–3, 4–7, 4–22, 7–3, 7–5,

7–14Connecting the control valve source 2–23Contamination 4–41, 7–22, B–1

Mirrors 1–6Control system

Tracer 3–4Critical pressure C–4Critical temperature C–4

Current 1–4Current loop 2–15, 4–22, 7–14

Calibrating 4–33, 7–19Receiver 2–17, 2–18

Current loop receiver 4–34

DData

Diagnostic 4–6, 4–7, 5–4Channel A 7–5Download 7–5

Data string 5–5, 8–4DC connection terminal block 2–12DC systems 2–12Detector 1–3Dew point temperature C–2Dry cycle 2–3

EElectric traced tubing 3–3, 3–4Electric tracer 3–4Electrical noise B–1, B–8Enclosure

Electronics 2–9, 2–10, 2–11, 2–12, 2–19H2O 2–10, 2–15, 2–17, 2–21H2S 2–10, 2–15, 2–17, 2–18,

2–19Heated 2–13

Enclosure heater 2–10, 2–12Energizing the circuit 4–1Erroneous readings 2–25Ethernet port 6–1

Active Start Hostlist 6–8Active Start Modem Mode 6–8Baud rate 6–4Change Setup 6–4Channel Configuration 6–4Configuration Port 6–1Connect Mode 6–6, 6–10ConnectMode 6–13Data configuration 6–3Data connection 6–3Data Port 6–1DHCP name 6–3, 6–4Disconnect Mode 6–13, 6–14, 6–17DisConnMode 6–13DisConnTime 6–16Flow control 6–5

Operator’s Manual Index–1


Flush Mode 6–14Full Verbose 6–11Gateway address 6–2Interface Mode 6–4IP Address 6–1IP address 6–2, 6–3, 6–8, 6–11Manual Mode 6–9Maximum Transmission Unit 6–18Modem Control In 6–7, 6–9Modem Mode 6–7, 6–9, 6–10, 6–12,

6–13Monitor Mode 6–3, 6–9, 6–11, 6–18,

6–21Netmask 6–2Pack Control 6–14, 6–15Port 77F0 6–20Port 77FE 6–19Port number 6–6Quiet Mode 6–10Retrycounter 6–8Retrytimeout 6–8Send characters 6–16Serial port 6–4Setup Mode 6–1, 6–3, 6–19

Excessive sampling gas pressure B–1, B–8, B–11

Excessive sampling gas temperature B–1, B–8, B–11

External data logger 7–14

FFaults

DeltaDC Restart Alrm 4–35DeltaT Restart Alarm 4–36Fit Restart Alarm 4–36Flow Switch Alarm 4–36FracShift Restart Alarm 4–36H2O

Null Fail B–13P/T Fail B–14Power Fail B–12Spectrum Fail B–13Track Fail B–10, B–14

H2SLaser Power too Low B–1, B–2,

B–11Pressure too High B–8, B–12Pressure too Low B–8, B–12Temperature too High B–8,

B–12, B–13Temperature too Low B–8,

B–12, B–13Laser Curnt High Alrm 4–36

Laser Curnt Low Alrm 4–36Laser Power High 4–36Laser Power Low 4–36Laser Zero High Alarm 4–36Laser Zero Low Alarm 4–36Low Purge Rate Alrm 4–36New Scrubber Alarm 3–12, 4–36Null Fail Error 7–21PeakTk Restart Alarm 4–36, B–8Power Fail Error 7–20Pressure High Alarm 4–36Pressure too Low 4–36PT Fail Error 7–21R2 Restart Alarm 4–37R3 Restart Alarm 4–37Spectrum Fail Error 7–21Temp High Alarm 4–37Temp Low Alarm 4–37Temperature too High 4–2, 4–37Temperature too Low 4–2, 4–37Track Fail Error 7–21

Faults/AlarmsAssignable Alarm 4–19, 4–20,

4–39, 5–16Concentra High Alarm 4–19, 4–20,

4–39Concentra Low Alarm 4–20, 4–39DeltaDC Restart Alrm 4–20DeltaT Restart Alarm 4–20, 4–39Fitting Restart Alrm 4–20, 4–39Flow Switch Alarm 4–20Flow Switch Alarm 1 4–39FracShft Restrt Alrm 4–21, 4–39General Fault Alarm 4–23H2O

Assignable Alarm 2–15, 2–18General Fault Alarm 2–15, 2–18

H2OGeneral Fault Alarm 7–20

H2OHigh Concentration Alarm

2–18H2O

High Concentration Alarm 7–20

Low Concentration Alarm 7–20Null Fail Error 7–21PT Fail Error 7–21Spectrum Fail Error 7–21Track Fail Error 7–21

H2SAssignable Alarm 2–15, 2–17General Fault Alarm 2–15,

2–17, 2–18

Index–2 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

Index

Historical Alarm Flag Codes 4–38Laser Curnt Low Alrm 4–20, 4–38Laser Power Low Alrm 4–20, 4–38Laser Powr High Alrm 4–20, 4–38Laser Zero High Alrm 4–20, 4–38Laser Zero Low Alrm 4–20, 4–38Lasr Curnt High Alrm 4–20, 4–38Low Purge Rate Alrm 4–39Need New Scrubber! 4–19New Scrubber Alarm 4–21, 4–39PeakTk Restart Alarm 4–20, 4–39Pressr Restart Alarm 4–21, 4–39Pressure High Alarm 4–20, 4–39Pressure Low Alarm 4–20, 4–38,

4–39R2 Reset Alarm 4–39R2 Restart Alarm 4–21R3 Restart Alarm 4–21, 4–39Temp High Alarm 4–20, 4–38, 4–39Temp Low Alarm 4–20, 4–38, 4–39Val 1 Fail Alarm 4–20Val 2 Fail Alarm 4–20Validation Fail Alarm 4–29, 5–21Validation Fail Alarm 1 4–39Validation Fail Alarm 2 4–39

Field-pressure reducing station 3–2, 3–4, 3–5, 3–7, 3–9Start up 3–4

Firmware version 8–16Flowmeter 3–9, 3–13, 7–21, 7–22

Bypass 3–5, 3–8, 3–9Sample 3–4, 3–5, 3–7

GGas leaks 2–22, 2–23, 2–24, B–1, B–2Gas sampling line B–2Gas solubility C–2Gas standard 3–12, 3–14, 4–40, 7–21Gateway IP Address 6–2Ground wire 2–12, 2–14

HH2O Keypad 7–3H2S Keypad 4–4Hardware 2–8Heated enclosure 2–14HyperTerminal 5–1, 8–1

IIdeal gas C–2Import stored data into spreadsheet 8–5Incident intensity 1–4

Initialization period 4–2, 7–2Installation 2–1, 2–8Intermediate calculation 4–7, 7–5Isopropanol B–4, B–6

KKeypad 4–3, 7–3

H2O 7–3H2S 4–3Modes 7–4

LLaser beam 1–3Laser output fluctuations 1–5LCD display 4–2, 7–2Leak detector 2–22, 2–23, 2–24, B–2Leaks B–1Lens cleaning cloth B–6Lens tissue B–4Liquid phase C–2Lock-in amplifier 1–6

MMass fraction C–1Mating terminal block 2–15, 2–16, 2–17,

2–18, 2–20Maximum sample supply pressure 3–8Measurement parameters 4–2, 7–2Measurement units 4–3, 7–3Membrane separator B–1Microsoft Excel 8–5Mirror contamination 1–6, B–2Modbus communications 5–8

Framing/protocol 5–8Modes

H2OMode 1 (Normal Mode) B–10Mode 2 (Set Parameter Mode)

B–10Mode 4 (System Diagnostic

Parameters) B–10, B–13, B–14

Mode 6 (Diagnostic Data Download) B–12, B–13, B–14

H2SMode 1 (Normal Mode) B–17Mode 6 (Diagnostic Data

Download) B–11Mode ^ (Normal Mode) 5–7Mode 1 (Normal Mode) 4–5, 5–7,

5–11, 7–3, 7–4, 7–9, 8–5, 8–14, B–9



Mode 2 (Set Parameter Mode - H2O) 8–4

Mode 2 (Set Parameter Mode - H2S) 7–4

Mode 2 (Set Parameter Mode) 4–5, 4–8, 4–39, 5–1, 5–6, 5–10, 7–4, 7–7, 7–9, 7–20, B–9

Mode 2, Change Parameters (Set Parameter Mode) 4–13

Mode 3 (Scrubber Life Data) 4–8Mode 3 (Set Parameter Mode) 7–5,

8–4, 8–14Mode 3 Not Used 4–5Mode 4 (Set Parameter Mode) 4–6Mode 4 (System Diagnostic

Parameters) 4–6, 7–5Mode 5 (Analog Output Test Mode)

4–7Mode 5 (Set Parameter Mode) 4–7Mode 5 (System Diagnostic

Parameters) 7–5Mode 6 (Diagnostic Data Download)

4–7, 4–29, 5–6, 5–7, 5–21, 7–5, 8–4, 8–5, 8–9

Mode 6 (Set Parameter Mode) 4–7Mode 7 (Measure Port1 Mode) 4–8Mode 8 (Not Used) 4–8Mode 9 (Recall Validation Results)

4–9Mode TEST (Analog Input Test Mode)

4–9Mode TEST (System Test) 7–6

Modes and functions 4–4Molecular weight C–1

NNational Institute of Standards and

Technology 4–41, 7–22Natural frequencies 1–4Nitrogen purge 3–8Normal cubic meter C–1Normal reference conditions C–1

OOptional analyzer hood 2–9Output Signal

4-20 mA current loop 2–15Serial output 2–15

PParameters

DiagnosticAlarm Flags 5–6

Concentration (ppmv) 5–5Current Midpoint 5–5Dry DC 5–5Dry Pressure 5–5Dry Temp 5–5DryDC 4–6DryPressure 4–6DryTemp 4–6Fit 4–6Fit Ratio 5–5Fit Ratio 2 5–5Fit Ratio 3 5–6Fit Ratio 4 5–6Fit Ratio 5 5–6Fit Ratio Dry 5–6Fit Ratio Dry-1 5–6Fit Residue 5–5Index Difference 5–5Indx 8–4, 8–17Mid 4–7Peak Index 5–5PkD1 7–21, 8–4, 8–16PkDf 7–21Powr 8–17PP2F 8–4, 8–17Process Path Fig 5–5Ref Index 5–5Val Fig 5–5Wet DC 5–5Wet Temp (C) 5–5WetDC 4–6WetPressure 4–6WetPressure (mb) 5–5WetTemp 4–6Zero 8–4, 8–17

InputConcentration Unit 4–17Custom Precision 4–18DO Alarm Setup 4–19, 4–39New Scrub Installed 4–23Val Attempts 4–29Val Duration 4–30Val Purge Period 4–31Validation Allowance 4–29Zero Val Tolerance 4–29, 4–32

Measurement and control 4–9# Spectrum Average 5–6, 8–4,

8–172 Way Com Port 4–13, 5–1120 mA Value 7–11, 8–174 mA Value 7–11, 7–20, 8–174-20 mA % Test 7–10, 7–20,

8–184-20 mA Alarm Action 7–10,

7–20, 8–17

Index–4 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

Index

4-20 mA Alarm Option 4–144-20 mA Test 4–7, 4–33, 4–344-20 mA Val Action 4–144-20mA Alarm Option 4–14,

4–15, 4–16, 4–35AI 20 mA Value 4–15AI 4 mA Value 4–15AI Pressure Input 4–15Analyzer ID 7–11AO 20 mA Test 4–16AO 20 mA Value 4–16AO 4 mA Value 4–15AO 4-20 mA Test 4–34Baud Rate 4–16Calculate Dew Point 4–16Calculate DewPoint 4–17Cancel Scrub Alarm 4–27Cancel Val Alarms 4–17, 4–37Component ID 7–12Concentration Unit 7–12, 8–17Daily Validation 4–19, 4–40DO Alarm Delay 7–13, 8–18DO Alarm Setup 7–13, 8–18General Alarm DO 4–21, 4–35,

B–9H2O

Peak Tracking B–10High Alarm Setpoint 4–21Keypad Watchdog 4–22Logger Rate 4–22, 7–14, 8–17Low Alarm Setpoint 4–22Low Power Warning 7–15,

7–20, 8–18Modbus Address 4–23, 5–10,

5–11, 7–15, 8–14, 8–17Modbus Mode 4–23, 5–1, 5–8,

5–11, 7–15, 8–1, 8–14, 8–18New Scrub Installed 3–12,

3–14Peak Tracking 4–24, 7–2, 7–16,

8–17, B–9Pipeline Pressure 4–15, 4–24,

8–17Powr 8–4Pressure Unit 4–25, 7–16, 8–17Process Purge Time 4–25Rapid Change Monitor 4–25RATA 4–25RATA Multiplier 4–26, 4–32,

4–33RATA Offset 4–26, 4–32, 4–33S Factor 7–17, 7–18, 8–16

S Factor Offset 7–17, 7–18, 8–16

Sample ID 7–16Set Time - Day 4–26Set Time - Hour 4–27Set Time - Minute 4–27Set Time - Month 4–27Set Time - Year 4–27Start Validation 4–28, 4–40Temperature Unit 4–28, 7–11,

7–17, 8–17User Password 7–18, 8–18Val 1 Concentration 4–28,

4–30, 5–21Val 2 Concentration 4–29,

4–30, 5–21Val Auto DumpSpectrm 4–29Val Interval 4–30, 4–40Val Perm Constant Kp 4–30Val Perm Constant Rp 4–31Val Start Time 4–19, 4–32, 4–40Validation Allowance 4–28,

4–30View and change 7–7Zero Val Tolerance 4–28

Password 4–13, 4–33, 5–10, 7–4, 7–9, 8–13, 8–15, 8–16, 8–18, B–9

PeakTk 4–36Pin numbers 2–16, 2–17Port

Check gas 7–21Pneumatic valve air or N2 supply 2–23Pressure relief vent 2–23Sample return 2–23Sample supply 2–22, 3–5Validation gas 7–21

Power input requirements 2–9Power terminal box 2–13, 2–14Powering down the analyzer 4–2Powering up the analyzer 4–1Pressure regulator 3–1, 3–4, 3–5, 3–6,

3–9

RRaoult’s law C–2, C–3Raw data 1–4Recommendations and solutions to

common problems 4–38, 7–21, B–1Reference state C–1Resonances

Natural frequencies



Return materials authorization (RMA) number B–18

RS-232 Output 8–1

SSample bypass 3–4, 3–6, 3–7, 3–8, 3–9,

3–13Sample bypass stream

Start up 3–5Sample cell B–1Sample cell pressure 4–3, 7–3Sample cell temperature 4–3, 7–3Sample condition system (SCS) B–7Sample conditioning system (SCS) 1–3,

3–1, 3–10, B–5Preventative and demand

maintenance 3–10Sample gas 1–3Sample probe 3–1, 3–2, 3–3, 3–5, 3–6,

3–9Saturated water vapor C–3Saturation C–2Saturation vapor pressure C–4Saving data from the serial port 5–6Scroll direction 4–13Scrubber 2–3, 3–13

Service 3–11Scrubber and scrubber efficiency

indicator replacement 3–13Scrubber efficiency indicator 3–12, 3–13,

3–14Serial cable 2–15, 2–16, 2–17Serial connection 2–15Serial port 2–17, 2–18, 5–6, 8–4Service contact B–17Shutdown analyzer

Short-term 3–7Signal wires 2–16, 2–17Spectra

2f 4–7, 7–5, 8–10DC 4–7, 7–5

Stainless steel tubing 2–21, 2–22, 2–23, B–1

System conditioning 2–25System Faults

Pressure Restart Alarm 4–37

TTemperature 4–3Temperature controller

Electric tracer 3–4Tools 2–8

Tools and supplies B–2Trace gas measurement (mixed

background) 1–6Tracer 3–4Tunable diode laser (TDL) 1–3Tunable diode laser absorption

spectroscopy (TDLAS) 1–3

UUnits 4–28

Concentration 4–17, 7–12Pressure 4–25, 7–16Temperature 4–28, 7–17

VValidation 4–40, 4–41, 7–21Validation source 4–28, 4–29Valve

Check gas 7–21, 7–22Metering 3–4, 3–5, 7–21, 7–22Relief 3–3, 3–4Sample probe isolation 3–4Sample supply hut-off 3–8Shut-off 3–4, 3–5

Sample system 3–4Validation gas 7–21, 7–22

ValvesCheck 3–8Isolation 3–1, 3–2, 3–6, 3–9Metering 3–7, 3–9Relief 3–7, 3–8, 3–9Sample probe isolation 2–21Shut-off 3–7, 3–8, 3–9

Header 3–7, 3–9Solenoid 2–3Switching 2–3

Vapor phase C–2Vent line 3–3Volume fraction C–1

WWarnings

DCdelta out of range 4–35Delta P out of range 4–34Delta T out of range 4–34Dry P out of range 4–34Fitting out of range 4–35FracShift out of range 4–35General 1–1H2S

Fit Delta Exceeds Limit B–15

Index–6 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

Index

Low Power Warning 7–20, 8–18Peak Tracking 4–35R2 out of range 4–35R3 out of range 4–35Unable to do validation 4–35

Water content C–1, C–3Water dew point C–2Wet cycle 2–3WMS signal detection 1–6




Index–8 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13

(H2S & H2O) - SpectraSensors€¦ · 2-Pack H2S/H2O Analyzer System ii 4900002006 rev. K 8-15-13 To start up the analyzer on process sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Documents